Home

Nikon D800 E User's Manual

1. Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution m If indicator blinks for 3s check photo n 4 monitor if after flash fires photo 187 blinks underexposed adjust may be underexposed i 3 settings and try again e Reduce quality or 84 87 size Memory insufficient to Delete photographs 234 FuLL Fu record further photos after copying CFI SD blinks at current settings or important images to blinks camera has run outof computer or other file or folder numbers device e Insert new memory 29 card Release shutter If error E persists or appears mE Camera malfunction frequently consult Nikon authorized service representative The CF and 0 Icons These icons flash to show the card affected Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution RA Camera cannot Turn camera off and No memory card E detect memory confirm that card is 29 card correctly inserted e Error accessing Use Nikon 434 memory card approved card e Check that contacts This memory are clean If card is card cannot be cAed damaged contact used E j retailer or Nikon Card may be D representative damaged f Unable tocreate Delete files or insert 29 234 Insert blinks hew folder new memory card another card after copying important images to computer or other device e Check that Eye Fi 34
2. 39 40 Focus and Shoot 1 Press the shutter Focus point release button halfway CO 41 At default settings the camera will focus on the subject in the center v focus point Frame a a photo in the viewfinder Focus Buffer with the main subject indicator capacity positioned in the center focus point and press the shutter release button halfway If the subject is poorly lit the AF assist illuminator may light Check indicators in the viewfinder When the focus operation is complete the in focus indicator will appear in the viewfinder Viewfinder display Description J Subject in focus gt Focus point is between camera and subject lt Focus point is behind subject gt lt Camera unable to focus on subject in focus blinks point using autofocus While the shutter release button is pressed halfway focus will lock and the number of exposures that Je can be stored in the memory buffer r O 105 will be shown in the viewfinder display For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus see Getting Good Results with Autofocus 4 100 3 Shoot Smoothly press the shutter es release button the rest of the HON way down to release the shutter and record the photograph eo Sa While the photograph is being Access lamp recorded to the memory card the access lamp will light Do not
3. Option m Option m Eh D Lighting 344 a Straighten 357 Red eye correction 345 9 Distortion control 358 X Trim 346 Fisheye 358 Monochrome 347 EZY Coloroutline 359 Filter effects 348 Colorsketch 359 goF Color balance 349 A Perspective control 360 h Image overlay 350 6 Miniature effect 361 NEF RAW processing 353 Selective color 362 Cm Resize 355 N Edit movie 74 C Quick retouch 357 eC Side by side comparison 364 1Can only be selected by pressing MENU and selecting amp tab 2 Available only if button is pressed in full frame playback when a retouched image or original is displayed 341 Creating Retouched Copies To create a retouched copy 1 Select an item in the i ROUEN Agnting retouch menu 7 Red eye correction trn pees Press A or W to highlight an Mi Fite effects Color balance item gt to select Image overlay NEF RAW processing 2 Selecta picture Monochrome Black and white Highlight a picture and press amp 3 100800 to view the highlighted picture mi EA 3 pa i full screen press and hold the amp es Fis button Zoom OK To view images in other locations press QE and select the desired card and folder e T as described on page 221 CREAN Cancel Retouch The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created with other devices 3 Select retouch options For more information s
4. m Subject Tracking The camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly leave the frame or are obscured by other objects change visibly in size color or brightness or are too small too large too bright too dark or similar in color or brightness to the background The Live View Display Live View Photography AF S IFFIE SDI An CINORME O F 18s Zz EG 2 gt ee J fe H o CO TED O 0O css Item Description m The amount of time remaining before live Time remaining view ends automatically Displayed if 56 57 shooting will end in 30s or less Monitor hue Displayed if monitor hue differs from the hue indicator produced by the current white balance 52 setting Autofocus mode The current autofocus mode 48 AF area mode The current AF area mode 49 a The current focus point The display varies Focus point with the option selected for AF area mode j ae A monitor brightness indicator 53 Guide A guide to the options available during live 52 53 view photography 51 52 Adjusting Monitor Hue If flash lighting is used with Flash or Preset manual white balance 145 the colors in the monitor may differ from those in the final photograph Monitor hue can be adjusted to reduce the effects of ambient lighting on the display in the monitor during live view photography for example whe
5. 315 316 f7 Shutter Spd amp Aperture Lock MEN button Custom Settings menu Selecting On for Shutter speed lock locks 7 Shutter spd amp aperture lock Shutter speed lock shutter speed at the value currently selected in mode Sor M Selecting On for Aperture lock locks aperture at the value currently selected in mode A or M Shutter speed and aperture lock are not available in mode F f8 Assign BKT Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the BKT button If high dynamic range or multiple exposure is active while another function is assigned to the BKT button the BKT button can not be used until high dynamic range or multiple exposure photography ends Option Description BKT Auto bracketing Press the BKT button and rotate the command dials to choose the bracketing increment and number of shots in the bracketing sequence M 132 Multiple exposure Press the BKT button and rotate the command dials to choose the mode and number of shots for multiple exposures 2 197 HDR HDR high ynamic range Press the BKT button and rotate the command dials to choose the mode and the exposure differential 176 f9 Customize Command Dials MEN button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls the operation of the main and sub command dials Option Description Reverse the direction of rotation of
6. AS a RGB Highlights ESA RGB ES sSelect R G B K Highlights RGB histogram Shooting data MBAUTO 0 0 222 HE File Information 1 Protect status FE Retouch indicator JE Focus point IE AF area brackets 5 Frame numb r total number of frames EJ mage quality Image size EJ mage area E Time of recording EJ Date of recording m El current CA SlOt seesssssscsssssssssssesssssssnseeees 12 Folder name E File name 1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options 1 261 2 If photograph was taken using AF S display shows point where focus first locked If photograph was taken using AF C focus point is only displayed if option other than auto area AF was selected for AF area mode and camera was able to focus 3 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non FX format including DX based movie format m 67 79 223 224 BE Highlights i 2 F mage highlights Folder number frame number2 271 HE Highlight display indicator 4 Current channel RGB Highlights Blinking areas indicate highlights areas that may be ae overexposed for current channel Hold 9 button and press lt or gt to cycle through channels as follows amp button RGB R G B all channels red green blue 2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non FX format including DX based movie format m 67 79
7. Option Description oe On Turn AF tuning on on off Off Turn AF tuning off Tune AF for the current lens CPU Move focal lenses only Press A or W tochoose point away Current Saved a value between 20 and 20 from camera value value Values for up to 20 lens types can be peron stored Only one value can be t Saved value stored for each type of lens ne Choose the AF tuning value used Default when no previously saved value exists for the current lens CPU Move focal Previous lenses only point toward value camera List previously saved AF tuning values To delete a lens from the list highlight the desired lens and press 1 To change a lens identifier for example to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value List can be used with only one lens of each type highlight the saved desired lens and press gt values The menu shown at right will be AF fine tune displayed press A or W to choose an identifier and press to save changes and exit Choose lens number 24 120mm F4 VR NO Tm 01 338 M AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied M Live View Tuning is not applied to autofocus during live view I 45 Saved Value Only one value can be stored for each type of lens If a tele
8. Insert the Battery 1 Turn the camera off vV Inserting and Removing Batteries Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries 2 Open the battery chamber cover Unlatch and open the battery chamber cover 3 insert the battery Insert the battery in the orientation shown using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side The latch locks the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted 4 Close the battery chamber cover 21 22 Removing the Battery Turn the camera off and open the battery chamber cover Press the battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by hand Note that the battery may be hot after use observe due caution when removing the battery To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use M EN EL15 Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL15 shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels 37 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged M 332 M The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xiii xv and 401 404 of this manual Do not use the battery at ambi
9. 204 Maximum aperture MON CPU lenses esesssesceeee PC mode indicator 15 Aperture stop indicatot 121 374 2 men PS PZV ADL WB BKT x5 21 Tine gat im ISO AUTO 28 22 aie ae 66 Ha 27 26 in a 25 23 24 Flash compensation indicator 188 GPS connection indicator 217 Shutter speed lock icon uu 126 g Clock not set indicatot 28 417 2 Interval timer indicator 201 204 Time lapse indicator 207 210 Aperture lock icon AF area mode indicator 93 95 HDR series indicator 7A K appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures s ssss 38 Beep indicator ISO sensitivity indicator ai Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 111 Multiple exposure series Auto area AF indicator 94 95 3D tracking indicator indicator sccicasscsscsssscccsssestisccteasccctaicerses 197 2 Flash mode nice racketing indicator ie 23 Autofocus moue WB bracketing indicator 137 MB D12 battery indicator ADL bracketing indicator 141 25 Battery indicator ssssssssesn Active D Lighting indicator 175 Number of exposures remaining Exposure compensation PEEN PEE NES EEE 38 436 indicator 130 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 00 105 436 ISO SENSITIVITY sseeessssesssseesesseees 109 Preset white balance
10. Q button To Use Description Press amp to zoom in to maximum of Z omin Q approximately 46x orout Q large images in 36 x 24 3 2 format 34x medium images or 22x small images Press 9 to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi View selector to view areas of image not visible in other monitor Keep multi selector pressed to areasof scroll rapidly to other areas of frame image Navigation window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border Faces up to 35 detected during zoom Sel t Va are indicated by white ices EN borders in navigation window Rotate sub command dial to view other faces 231 To Use Description View E Rotate main command dial to view same other location in other images at current zoom images c4 ratio Playback zoom is cancelled when a movie is displayed Change protect Om 3 2 See page 233 for more information status Return to Press the shutter release button halfway or shooting v press the M button to exit to shooting mode ay mode Display MENU See page 259 for more information menus 232 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame Zoom and thumbnail playback the O n F button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion Prot
11. A MB D12 battery type display 297 MB D12 battery indicator 298 Depth of field preview button H ASSIGMNMENN siye 315 39 Flash compensation indicator 188 fg Color space indicator 274 Exposure compensation 47 Active D Lighting indicator 175 3 MAICA O siirsin High ISO noise reduction Vignette control indicator H indicator ADL bracketing amount ia 43 Camera battery indicator essen Turning the Monitor Off To clear shooting information from the monitor press the M button twice more or press the shutter release button halfway The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay 292 For information on changing the color of the lettering in the information display see Custom Setting d9 Information display 296 12 HE Changing Settings in the Information Display To change settings for the items listed below press the M button in the information display Highlight items using the multi selector and press to view options for the highlighted item ry E hooti jig ment Em A EAE E GSA Omo BKT a ma S 1 Shooting menu bank 269 yA AE L AF L button assignment 315 JE High ISO noise reduction 277 E BKT button assignmen
12. __ _ objects passing through the frame AFz 1 Short The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance to the subject changes Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession a4 AF Activation MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Off If Shutter AF ON is selected both the 4 AF activation shutter release button and the AF 0N button can be used to initiate autofocus If AF ON Shute AFON GS only is selected autofocus is only initiated AFON only when the AF ON button is pressed 283 a5 AF point Illumination MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder Option Description Auto The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish contrast with the background The selected focus point is always highlighted regardless of On the brightness of the background Depending on the brightness of the background the selected focus point may be difficult to see off The selected focus point is not highlighted The area outside the current crop is shown in grey 2 81 a6 Focus Point Wrap Around MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether focus point selection wraps around from one edge of the viewfinder to another Option Description Focus point selection wraps around Fo Gees from top to bottom bottom to
13. will be displayed in the control panel 149 150 White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as Incandescent is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually make them blue Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106 is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters E g 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired The WB Button At settings other than KI Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the amber A blue B axis 2 149 to fine tune white balance when PRE is selected use the shooting menu as described on page 148 Six settings in both directions are available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired M 150 Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed i
14. on View shooting Press the button to display information on shutter speed aperture and other photo settings in place of photo info movie recording information Press again to return to the movie recording display a AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the button is pressed Ma AE lock only Exposure locks while the button is pressed fa AE lock Hold Exposure locks when the button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off Ya AF lock only Focus locks while the button is pressed None Pressing the button has no effect 323 324 g4 Assign Shutter Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by pressing the shutter release button when amp is selected with the live view selector Option Description Take photos Press the shutter release button all the way down to end movie recording and take a photograph with an aspect ratio of 16 9 for information on image size see page 68 4B Record movies Press the shutter release button halfway to start movie live view You can then press the shutter release button halfway to focus and press it all the way down to start or end recording To end movie live view press the button The shutter release buttons on optional remote cords M 390 function in the same way as the camera shutter release button Record
15. 277 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings To display the Custom Settings menu press MENU and select the Custom Settings menu tab CUSTOM SETTING MENU i _ USTOM SETTING MENU ti A Le F a Autofocus K4 b Metering exposure T c Timers AE lock i E d Shooting display B E Bracketing flash f Controls G D M 3 Movie MENU button Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences Custom Setting groups Main menu a Autofocus a2 AFS priority selection Focus tracking with lock on AF a4 AF activation ON ka b Metering exposure b1ISO sensitivity step value 1 3 b2EV steps for exposure entr 1 3 b Metering exposure KA 3 Exp flash comp step value 1 3 b4 Easy exposure compensation OFF Cc Timers AE lock c Timers AE lock b11SO sensitivity step value 1 3 b2EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 7 E Bracketing flash SEA Enti O Aaii f Controls d Shooting display c3 Selftimer M ovie 17 c4 Monitor off delay d2 CL mode shooting speed Custom settings bank Bracketing flash a7 ISO display and adjustment OFF a8 Screen tips d C Bl m E4 a9 Information display c dOLCD illumination 1 f Controls Flash cntrl for built in flash TTL i Modeling flash Reset OK Lelia Auto bracketing set Custom settings Auto bracketing Mode M bank 280 Movie fi2Reverse indicators Assign MB D12 AF ON ale A
16. BE RGB Histogram Hy mage highlights Folder number frame number 2 White balance Color temperature White balance fine tuning Preset manual 4 Current channel Histogram RGB channel In all histograms horizontal axis gives pixel brightness vertical axis number of pixels 6 Histogram red channel Histogram green channel Bi Histogram blue channel Blinking areas indicate highlights areas that may be IB overexposed for current channel Hold 9 button and press lt or gt to cycle through channels as follows amp button RGB R G B lt gt lt gt gt all channels red green blue Highlight display off 2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non FX format including DX based movie format 67 79 225 226 Playback Zoom EN et To zoom in on the photograph when the C adad histogram is displayed press amp Use the amp and Qi buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the ES adail image with the multi selector The histogram will ies IATH 0 0 be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the monitor Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications Some sample histograms are shown below If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be
17. Clock not set indicator remains for over 1000 EFA Interval timer indicator OXPOSUPES ssrsssssisoossssssassessssetecesssscaasecies 38 Time lapse indicator Number of exposures remaining o cescseecssescnseccsecesseceneenseernee 38 g GPS connection indicator Manual lens numbet sssssseeesees 214 g Image comment indicator Aperture lock icon ene pecan ee od sea MMMM E 207 210 HDR series indicator Fn button assignment 311 Multiple exposure series ndiCator re 197 28 AE L AF L button assignment 315 Copyright information EJ BKT button assignment 316 indicator Long exposure noise reduction Exposure and flash R indicator a 277 bracketing indicator 133 E Custom settings bank 280 WB bracketing indicator 137 32 Shooting menu bank 269 ADL bracketing indicator 141 White balance cscsssssssssssssssssssseseee 145 Exposure compensation indicator 130 indicator Bracketing progress indicator EZ Auto area AF indicator Exposure and flash bracketing 133 Focus points indicator WB bracketing AF area mode indicator ADL bracketing 3D tracking indicator Beep indicator Image area indicator EJ HENAO viesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssee i Exposure indicator White balance fine tuning 11 The Information Display Continued 37 38 3940 50 41 Iso AUTO 2 j FRO AAL __ m a BABB
18. JPEG Compression Choose the type of compression for JPEG images Option Description Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform file size Optimal Optimal image quality File size varies with scene quality recorded NEF RAW Recording gt Type Choose the type of compression for NEF RAW images i Size priority 4 Option Description NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm reducing file size by about 20 40 with no effect on image quality NEF images are compressed using a non ON Compressed reversible algorithm reducing file size by about 35 55 with almost no effect on image quality Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed NEF RAW Recording gt NEF RAW Bit Depth Choose a bit depth for NEF RAW images Lossless ONE compressed gt Option Description 12 bit 12 bit NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits 14bit 14 bit producing files larger than those with a bit depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data recorded 86 Image Size Image size is measured in pixels Choose from Large Medium or Small note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area M 79 Image area Option Size pixels Print size cm in FX 36X24 1 0 L 7 360 x 4 912 62 3 x 41 6 24 5 x 16 4 A M
19. Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using Custom settings bank M 280 BE Setup Menu Defaults Option Default Monitor brightness M 326 Manual Manual 0 Clean image sensor M 394 Clean at startup shutdown M 396 Clean at startup amp shutdown HDMI CQ 256 Output resolution M 257 Auto Advanced M 257 Output range Auto Output display size 95 Live view on screen display On Flicker reduction M 329 Auto Time zone and date M 329 Daylight saving time 1 329 Off Auto image rotation M 331 On GPS M 218 Auto meter off Enable Use GPS to set camera clock Yes Eye Fi upload M 339 Enable Exposure Program The exposure program for programmed auto M 118 is shown in the following graph ISO 100 lens with maximum aperture of f 1 4 and minimum aperture of f 16 e g AF 50mm f 1 4D N Eee RUr YR VD HO O1 D w tn ae 11 4 K t 2 ro 112 8 6 A P F RS Y se lt L te aS 11 gt a 116 a e 122 P 1 32 30 15 8 4 2 1 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 5001000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 16 3 EV are reduced to 16 1 3 EV Troubleshooting
20. Save Load Settings MENU button gt Y setup menu Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card or to the memory card in the primary card slot if two memory cards are inserted M 89 if the card is full an error will be displayed Use this option to share settings among D800 cameras Menu Option Playback display options Image review After delete Rotate tall Shooting menu bank Extended menu banks File naming Primary slot selection Secondary slot function Image quality Image size Image area JPEG compression Shooting NEF RAW recording all banks White balance with fine tuning and presets d 1 d 4 Set Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting Vignette control Auto distortion control Long exposure NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Movie settings Playback Custom settings all banks All Custom Settings 335 Menu Option Clean image sensor HDMI Flicker reduction Time zone and date excepting date and time Language Setup Auto image rotation Image comment Copyright information GPS Non CPU lens data Eye Fi upload All My Menu items My Menu All recent settings R t Setti iy rupee Choose tab Settings saved using the D800 can be restored by selecting Load settings Note that Save load settings is only av
21. Time stamp Highlight Printer default use current printer settings Print time stamp print times and dates of recording on photos or No time stamp and press to select and exit to the previous menu Cropping This option is available only if supported by the printer To exit without cropping highlight No cropping and press To crop the current picture highlight Crop and press gt Selecting Crop displays the Cropping dialog shown at right Press amp to increase the size of the crop 9E to decrease Position the crop using the multi selector and press S Note that print quality may GB GOK drop if small crops are printed at large sizes 4 start printing Printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel e E before all copies have been printed press Cancel 250 Printing Multiple Pictures 1 Display the PictBridge menu Press the MENU button in the PictBridge playback display see Step 3 on page 248 EER He 2 Choose an option PictBridge Highlight one of the following options and press gt Print 0P0P index print e Print select Select pictures for printing Print DPOF Print an existing print order created with the DPOF print order option in the playback menu M 254 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 Index print To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card procee
22. ssssssssssssesserssteeseene 118 Flicker reduction ee Fluorescent White balance we 145 121 374 212 378 379 Focal length scale Focal length scale index Focal plane mark Focus indicator Focus lock Focus mode FOCUS mode SWITCH sssssssssesessssssss 24 25 FOCUS point seseessssseeeneee 49 93 96 285 Focus point wrap around ss FOCUS traCkiNng essccssssssscecsseesceeesees Focus tracking with lock on Focusing screen Focus mode selector Format Format memory card Frame interval Slide show we 267 Frame rate 70 104 210 Framing grid 8 295 183 a 219 Front curtain sync Full frame playback Full time servo AF FV LOCK eseesssseesseee FX 36 x 24 1 0 x FX fOMTMAL saissssssssecssscsasistsssassasaterasennis HDMI mini pin connector 3 256 Headphones Hide image High definition High Dynamic Range HDR me High ISO NR sssssssssssessssesssessresssessseesersssee Highlights Histogram Image area Image comment Image Dust Off ref photo 0 06 327 Image overlay Image quality Image review Image size Incandescent White balance 145 Index print In focus indicator 40 98 102 Information 222 261 Information display 10 295 296 Interval timer shooting ISO display and adjustment ISO sensitivity ISO sensitivity s
23. 83 84 Image Quality The D800 supports the following image quality options See page 436 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored at different image quality and size settings Option File type Description NEF RAW NEF RAW data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic Format NEF Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted on a computer after shooting Record uncompressed TIFF RGB images at a bit TIFF RGB TIFF depth of 8 bits per channel 24 bit color TIFF is RGB supported by a wide variety of imaging applications JPEG fine Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of JPEG normal JPEG JPEG basic roughly 1 4 fine image quality Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 8 normal image quality Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic image quality NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG fine and one fine quality JPEG image NEF RAW NEF JPEG normal JPEG NEF RAW JPEG basic Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one normal quality JPEG image Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one basic quality JPEG image Size priority selected for JPEG compression Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is display
24. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help FC Nikon D800 D800E CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 xvii xviii Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to a
25. Control panel Viewfinder 3D tracking When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Consequently 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame AF Area Mode AF area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder AF area mode Control Viewfinder AF area mode conima Viewfinder panel panel Single point 51 point ar 5 ER ooe d5 E 9 point dynamic area f 4 3D tracking 34 AF 21 point dynamic area d2 peggy Auto areaAF Auto MA AF Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Manual Focus Single point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used See Also For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera see Custom Setting a3 Focus tracking with lock on M 283 See page 49 for information on the autofocus options available in live view or during movie recording 95 96 Focus Point Selection The camera offers a choice of 51 focus points that can be used to compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to This allows the multi selector
26. D Lighting DPOF print order Dust off ref PHOTO escscssseescceeseeees DX 24 x 16 1 5 x DX format es DX based movie format 68 Dynamic area AF sessssesscsseeecneeees 93 95 E Easy exposure compensation 288 Edit movie Electronic rangefinder Ethernet Exp flash comp step value 287 EXPOSUTre 0 115 117 128 130 132 Exposure bracketing 132 307 308 Exposure Compensation sses 130 Exposure delay mode Exposure differential Exposure indicator Exposure lock Exposure meters Exposure mode Exposure program Extended menu banks ssessseeecsees 270 External microphone 65 70 389 Eye Fi upload ssssessssesesssesssoesssssresssre 339 F Face priority AF File information File naming File number sequence Filter effects 348 Filter effects Set Picture Control 166 167 Fine tune optimal exposure 290 Firmware version 340 a 358 FlaSH ucssessssssecseeee 181 188 190 380 381 Flash White balance 145 Flash bracketing 132 307 308 Flash cntrl for built in flash Flash compensation Flash MOdeC sssseseceeeeees oo Flash only Auto bracketing set 132 307 Flash pop up button ssssssssesrssssssssses 181 Flash range Flash shutter speed Flash sync speed Flash sync terminal Flash ready indicator 9 181 191 305 384 428 Flexible ProQram
27. Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed Ma AElockonly Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and AE lock f i OS Reset on remains locked until the button is pressed a second ri time the shutter is released or the exposure meters release turn off AE lock Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and a Hold remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fa AFlockonly Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed EXE AF ON Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus Flashoff The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn button is pressed 311 Option Description If the Fn button is pressed while exposure flash or ADL bracketing is active in single frame or quiet shutter release mode all shots in the current bracketing aT Bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter release burst button is pressed If white balance bracketing is active or continuous release mode mode CH or CL is selected the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter release button is held down Matrix Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed Center y ae S ighted Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn weig F button is pressed metering go Spot Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed Fn button p
28. In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture Flexible Program In exposure mode F different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main command dial while the exposure meters are on flexible program Rotate the dial to the right for large apertures small f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Main command dial Rotate the dial to the left for small apertures large f numbers that increase depth of field or F slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect an asterisk X appears in the control panel To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings rotate the dial until the asterisk is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off See Also See page 411 for information on the built in exposure program For information on activating the exposure meters see Auto Meter Off on page 42 5 Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will p
29. Normal area Live view movie Exposure off AF compensation Bracketing off AE lock hold Off Front curtain Flash mode Aperture lock Off sync Shutter speed Flash lock Off compensation of Autofocus mode AF S FV lock Off Exposure delay off mode NEF RAW Off 1 Focus point not displayed if auto area AF is selected for AF area mode 2 Number of shots is reset to zero Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV exposure flash bracketing or 1 white balance bracketing E A Auto is selected for the second shot of two shot ADL bracketing programs 3 Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings bank option will be reset 2 280 Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected See Also See page 405 for a list of default settings 194 Multiple Exposure Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures in a single photograph Multiple exposures can make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor to produce colors noticeably superior to those in software generated photographic overlays Creating a Multiple Exposure Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view Exit live view before proceeding Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s extend the meter off delay using Custom Setting c2
30. al Smoothing HDR high dynamic range Exposure differential Auto 1EV 2EV NORM choosing a value higher than required may not produce the desired results if Auto is selected the camera will automatically adjust exposure to suit the scene Choose the amount of smoothing To choose how much the boundaries between the two images are smoothed highlight Smoothing and press gt The options shown at right will be displayed Highlight an option and press Higher values produce a smoother composite image Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects a HDR high dynamic range HDR mode Exposure differential Smoothing HDR high dynamic range Smoothing l Normal Low 5 Framea photograph focus and shoot The camera takes two exposures when the shutter release button is pressed all the way down sob Wl will be displayed in the control panel and wab Har in the voile fe viewfinder while the images are Control panel combined no photographs can be taken P tob Ta fk C a mj B L al tf until recording is complete Regardless of the option currently selected for release ZIAN mode only one photograph will be taken Viewfinder each time the shutter release button is pressed If On series is selected HDR will only turn off when Off is selected for HDR mode if On single photo is selected HDR turns
31. highlight Add items and press gt MY MENU Image quality JPEG compression 4 Type t4 Assign Fn button Add items Remove items Rank items Choose tab Select a menu Highlight the name of the menu containing the option you wish to add and press Add items Playback menu Shooting menu Custom setting menu Setup menu Retouch menu Select an item Highlight the desired menu item and press button Add items Shooting menu Image area v JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Position the new item Press A or W to move the new item up or down in My Menu Press to add the new item Image size Add more items The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check mark Items indicated by aN icon can not be selected Repeat steps 1 4 to select additional items Add items Shooting menu Shooting menu bank Extended menu banks File naming Primary slot selection Secondary slot function v Image quality 367 EE Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu highlight Remove items and press gt 2 Select items Remove items Done Highlight items and press gt to FETE select or deselect Selected eraan items are indicated by a check Ea mark 3 Select Done Remove items A Image size Highlight Done and press E I
32. v v l l Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering Selected with flash unit Auto aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit Can be selected with camera Select 1 320s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 299 8 CPU lens required N NAW BW Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non TTL auto and manual modes Flash unit SB 80DX SB 30 SB 27 2 SB 28DX cp copy 58225 5822 TRE SB 28 SB 26 SB 20 BORS Flash mode SB 25 SB 24 SB 16B SB 15 A Non TTL auto Vv Yv M Manual Y Yv Vv Vv Repeating flash z T REAR Rear curtain v v v v sync 1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 2 Autofocus is available with AF S VR Micro Nikkor 105mm f 2 8G IF ED and AF S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f 2 8G ED lenses only 3 Available when camera is used to select flash mode Auto Aperture Non TTL Auto Unless the focal length and maximum aperture are specified using the Non CPU lens data option in the setup menu M 213 choosing auto aperture AA when a non CPU
33. wide landscape orientation Select On for Rotate tall V 266 e Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation M 331 e Photo is displayed in image review M 220 e Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken 331 Can not delete photo e Picture is protected remove protection M 233 Memory card is locked 2 34 Can not retouch picture Picture was not created with D800 2 342 Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback Select All for Playback folder N 260 Can not change print order Memory card is full delete pictures A 38 234 Memory card is locked 34 Can not select photo for printing NEF RAW and TIFF photos can not be printed by direct USB connection Use DPOF print service TIFF images only create JPEG copy using NEF RAW processing M 353 or transfer to computer and print using ViewNxX 2 supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately N 389 Photo is not displayed on high definition video device Confirm that HDMI cable available separately is connected M 256 Photos are not displayed in Capture NX 2 Update to latest version 1 389 Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low pass filter Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed
34. will button be displayed in the control panel The WB Button The WB button can be used to select the color temperature for the amber A blue B axis only Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel adjustments are made in mireds M 150 To enter a color temperature directly in increments of 10 K press the WB button and press lt or gt to highlight a digit and press A or W to change WB button Control panel I Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose 4 Flash or Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate 153 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast The camera can store up to four values for preset white balance in presets d 1 through d 4 Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under Direct measurement _ lighting that will be used in final photograph and white balance is measured by camera M 155 Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory photograph card CO
35. A Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury In addition note that small parts constitute a chocking hazard Should a child swallow any part of this equipment consult a physician immediately A Donot place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation A Donot remain in contact with the camera battery or charger for extended periods while the devices are on or in use Parts of the device become hot Leaving the device in direct contact with the skin for extended periods may result in low temperature burns A Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not short or disassemble the battery Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat Do not immerse in or expose to water Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid
36. Auto FP High Speed Sync Flash sync speed 1 320 s Auto FP 1 250 s Auto FP 1 250s Built in Optional Built in Optional Built in Optional Shutter speed flash flashunit flash flashunit flash flash unit From s 000 to but not including 1 320 s From 320 to but not including 1 250 s 1 250 30 s Flash sync Flash range drops as shutter speed increases Flash range will nevertheless be greater than that obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP AutoFP AutoFP Flash sync AutoFP M The Flash Ready Indicator When the flash fires at full power the flash indicator in the camera viewfinder will blink to warn that the resulting photograph may be underexposed Note that the flash ready indicators on optional flash units will not display this warning when 1 320 s Auto FP is selected e2 Flash Shutter Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option determines the slowest shutter speed available when using front or rear 0 curtain sync or red eye reduction in programmed auto or aperture priority auto exposure modes regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in shutter priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1 60 s 1 60 s to 30 s 30 s 300 e3 Flash Cntr
37. If the camera fails to function as expected check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative HE Display Viewfinder is out of focus Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter adjustment lenses M 35 388 Viewfinder is dark Insert a fully charged battery 0 19 37 Displays turn off without warning Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay or c4 Monitor off delay 291 292 Displays in control panel or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim The response times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature If the Camera Stops Responding In extremely rare instances the displays may not respond as expected and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery taking care to avoid burns and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again If the problem persists contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative BE Shooting Camera takes time to turn on Delete files or folders Shutter release disabled Memory card is full ZO 29 38 e Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f11 Slot empty release lock 319 and no memory card is inserted 29 e CPU lens with aperture ring attached but
38. Shooting menu bank item in the shooting menu 1 270 e Changing bracketing settings M 132 e Terminating HDR M 176 or multiple exposure shooting 195 Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends BE No Photograph The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was due to start the photograph or photographs for the previous interval have yet to be taken the memory buffer is full or the camera is unable to focus in AF S note that the camera focuses again before each shot Shooting will resume with the next interval Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval In CH continuous high speed mode photographs will be taken at the rate given on page 104 In S single frame and C continuous low speed modes photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2 CL mode shooting speed 1 293 in mode Q camera noise will be reduced Shooting Menu Banks Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks Q 269 If shooting menu settings are reset using the Shooting menu bank item in the shooting menu M 270 interval timer settings will be reset as follows e Choose start time Now Number of shots 1 Interval 00 01 00 Start shooting Off Number of intervals 1 Time Lapse Photography The ca
39. and EH 5 AC adapters can also be used A power connector EP 5B is required to connect the camera to the EH 5b EH 5a or EH 5 see page 391 for details Note that when the camera is used with an MB D12 the EP 5B must be inserted into the MB D12 not the camera Do not attempt to use the camera with power connectors inserted into both the camera and MB D12 Wireless Transmitter WT 4 Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on the same network or copied to a computer for long term storage The Wades lan camera can also be controlled from any computer on the adapters 2 11245 network using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Note that the WT 4 requires an independent power source in the form of an optional EH 6b AC adapter or EN EL3e battery See the WT 4 manual for details Always use the Y latest version of the WT 4 software 387 Viewfinder eyepiece accessories Rubber Eyecup DK 19 The DK 19 makes the image in the viewfinder easier to see preventing eye fatigue Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK 17C To accommodate individual differences in vision viewfinder lenses are available with diopters of 3 2 0 1 and 2 m Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control 3 to 1 m Test diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that t
40. f 2 8G IF ED 24 55mm No vignetting AF S NIKKOR 16 35mm f 4G ED VR 35mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S Zoom Nikkor 17 35mm f 2 8D 28mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in IF ED 35mm No vignetting AF Zoom Nikkor 18 35mm 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in f 3 5 4 5D IF ED 28 35mm_ No vignetting AF Zoom Nikkor 20 35mm f 2 8Dp F 24MM_ 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 28 35mm No vignetting AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED Samm EBON Sane 50 70mm No vignetting Xd AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 24 120mm 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in f 3 5 5 6G IF ED 28 120mm No vignetting AF S NIKKOR 24 120mm f 4G ED VR 28MM __ 1 0 m 3ft3 in 35 120mm No vignetting AF S Zoom Nikkor 28 70mm f 2 8D 35mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in IF ED 50 70mm_ No vignetting AF S NIKKOR 28 300mm f 3 5 5 6G 35mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in ED VR 50 300mm No vignetting PC E NIKKOR 24mm f 3 5D ED 24mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in When not shifted or tilted When used with the AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED the flash will be unable to light the entire subject at all ranges The built in flash can also be used with AI S Al Al modified NIKKOR Nikon Series E and non CPU lenses with a focal length of 24 300mm Al 50 300mm f 4 5 modified Al 50 300mm f 4 5 and Al S 50 300mm f 4 5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 180mm or above and Al 50 300mm f 4 5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 135mm or above AF Assist Illumination AF assist illumination is available with lenses with
41. modes Lens aperture Instant return electronically controlled Lens Compatible lenses Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses including type G and D lenses some restrictions apply to PC Micro NIKKOR lenses and DX lenses using DX 24 x 16 1 5x image area Al P NIKKOR lenses and non CPU Al lenses exposure modes f and only IX NIKKOR lenses lenses for the F3AF and non Al lenses can not be used The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the electronic rangefinder supports the 11 focus points with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f 8 or faster Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane shutter Speed 1 3000 30 s in steps of 1 3 2 or 1 EV bulb X250 Flash sync speed X 1 250 s synchronizes with shutter at 1 320 s or slower flash range drops at speeds between 1 250 and 1 320 s Release Release mode S single frame CL continuous low speed CH continuous high speed Q quiet shutter release self timer Mur mirror up Release Approximate frame With EN EL15 batteries Other power sources advance rate Image area FX 5 4 Image area FX 5 4 CL 1 4 fps CL 1 4 fps Cu 4 fps Cu 4 fps Image area DX 1 2x Image area 1 2x Ct 1 5 fps Ci 1 5 fps Cu 5 fps Cu 5 fps Image area DX Ci 1 5 fps CH 6 fps Self timer 2s 55s 10 s 20 s 1 9 exposure
42. photography is in progress Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval BE Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval timer photography can be paused by e Pressing the button between intervals e Highlighting Start gt Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing Turning the camera off and then on again if desired the memory card can be replaced while the camera is off e Selecting self timer or Mup release mode To resume shooting 1 Choose anew starting Interval timer shooting Choose start time time o m Start time k Choose a new starting time as Pause described on page 201 01 00 A 1003 x2 0006 14 56 2 Resu me shooting 2 itera timer shooting al Highlight Restart and Oi m press Note that if x interval timer photography EE Os SuN was paused during i ELU shooting any shots button remaining in the current interval will be canceled off a 205 206 HE Interrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted Interval timer photography can also be ended by e Selecting Start gt Off in the interval timer menu Performing a two button reset M 193 e Resetting settings for the current shooting menu bank using the
43. 1 Autofocus not supported 2 Autofocus and electronic TC 20E Il g rangefinding support focus Bee 222889220 TC20EIll 2 points shown at right when used with TC 17E Il TC 20E Il or TC 20E III AF S teleconverters When used with TC 20E II TC 20E Ill focus data for focus points other than the center focus point are obtained from line sensors Single point AF is used when 3D tracking or auto area AF is selected for AF area mode M 93 at maximum or combined apertures slower than f 5 6 the camera may not be able to focus on dark or low contrast subjects Lens f number The f number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens Compatible Non CPU Lenses When using non CPU lenses and accessories select exposure mode Fi or Mand set aperture using the lens aperture ring In other modes the shutter release is disabled Non CPU lens data M 212 can be used to enable many of the features available with CPU lenses including color matrix metering if no data are provided center weighted metering will be used in place of color matrix metering while if the maximum aperture is not provided the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring m Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The following can NOT be used with the D800 TC 16AS AF teleconverter AF lenses for the F3AF AF 80mm Non Al lenses f 2 8 AF
44. 215 Record latitude longitude altitude and UTC time with pictures GPS Adapter Cord MC 35 A 216 Connects GPS devices to D800 via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS device length 35 cm 1 ft 2 in Modulite Remote Control Set ML 3 Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8 m 26 ft 3 in Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter 1 Ready the camera Open the battery chamber and power connector covers 2 Insert the EP 5B power connector Be sure to insert the connector in the orientation shown using the connector to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side The latch locks the connector in place when the connector is fully inserted 3 Close the battery chamber cover Position the power connector cable so that it passes through the power connector slot and close the battery chamber cover 4 connect the AC adapter 392 Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter and the EP 5B power cable to the DC socket When the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector the battery level display in the monitor turns off Q Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period remove the battery and store it in a cool dry area
45. 255 256 Viewing Photographs on TV A type C mini pin High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable Connect the HDMI cable as shown lt O A Connect to high definition device choose cable with connector for HDMI device Connect to camera Tune the device to the HDMI channel Turn the camera on and press P button During playback images will be displayed both in the camera monitor and on the high definition television or monitor screen I Close the Connector Cover Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer HDMI Options The HDMI option in the setup menu M 325 controls output resolution and other advanced HDMI options HE Output Resolution Choose the format for images output to the HDMI HDMI device If Auto is selected the put Tesolin camera will automatically select the gy appropriate format Regardless of the option selected Auto will be used for p Sania movie live view movie recording and playback BE Advanced Option Description Auto is recommended in most situations If the camera
46. 291 f12 Reverse indicators 319 c4 Monitor off delay 292 _ f13 Assign MB D12 AF ON 320 d Shooting display g Movie d1 Beep 292 g1 Assign Fn button 321 d2 CL mode shooting speed 293 g2 Assign preview button 322 d3 Max continuous release 293 g3 Assign AE L AF L button 323 d4 Exposure delay mode 293 _g4 Assign shutter button 324 d5 File number sequence 294 d6 Viewfinder grid display 295 d7 ISO display and adjustment 295 d8 Screen tips 295 d9 Information display 296 d10 LCD illumination 296 d11 MB D12 battery type 297 d12 Battery order 298 279 280 Custom Settings Bank MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption of up to 20 characters in length can be added by highlighting the menu bank and pressing as described on page 170 EE Restor
47. 308 MTR gt under gt over f1 8 switch M 309 LCD backlight 8 f2 Multi selector center button A 309 Shooting mode Select center focus point Playback mode Thumbnail on off Live view Select center focus point f3 Multi selector 2 310 Do nothing f4 Assign Fn button 311 Fn button press M 311 Viewfinder virtual horizon Fn button command dials M 314 None Option Default f5 Assign preview button M 315 Preview button press Preview Preview command dials None 6 Assign AE L AF L button 4 315 AE L AF L button press AE AF lock AE L AF L command dials None f7 Shutter spd amp aperture lock A 316 Shutter speed lock Off Aperture lock Off f8 Assign BKT button 1 316 Auto bracketing f9 Customize command dials V 317 Exposure compensation O Reverseirotation 21317 sities eet planta o Change main sub 317 off Aperture setting 317 Sub command dial Menus and playback 2 318 Off f10 Release button to use dial M 318 No f11 Slot empty release lock 1 319 Enable release f12 Reverse indicators M 319 hime f13 Assign MB D12 AF ON M 320 AF ON g1 Assign Fn button 1 321 Fn button press None g2 Assign preview button M 322 Preview button press Index marking g3 Assign AE L AF L button 1 323 AE L AF L button press AE AF lock g4 Assign shutter button 1 324 Take photos
48. 5 520 x 3 680 46 7 x 31 2 18 4 x 12 3 FX format S 3 680 x 2 456 31 2 x 20 8 12 3 x 8 2 12x 30x20 L 6 144 x 4 080 52 0 x 34 5 20 5 x 13 6 pe M 4 608x3 056 39 0 x 25 9 15 4x 10 2 S 3 072 x 2 040 26 0 x 17 3 10 2 x 6 8 DX 24x16 1 5 L 4 800 x 3 200 40 6 x 27 1 16 0 x 10 7 falas M 3 600 x 2 400 30 5 x 20 3 12 0x 8 0 DX format S 2 400 x 1 600 20 3 x 13 5 8 0 x 5 3 L 6 144 x 4 912 52 0 x 41 6 20 5 x 16 4 5 4 30x24 M 4 608 x 3 680 39 0 x 31 2 15 4 x 12 3 S 3 072 x 2 456 26 0 x 20 8 10 2 x 8 2 Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Image size can be set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired option is displayed in the control panel QUAL button Control panel Sub command dial 87 88 NEF RAW Images Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images When opened in software such as ViewNX 2 supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately NEF RAW images have the dimensions given for large L size images in the table on the previous page The Image Size Menu p SHOOTING MENU Image size can also be adjusted using the Image EIF saumana size option in the shooting menu M 268 storaaeitolder File naming Primary slot selection E Secondary slot f
49. 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector 2 6 fps MB D12 battery pack with EN EL15 battery 5 fps MB D12 battery pack with EN EL18 battery 6 fps MB D12 battery pack with AA size batteries 2 3 6 fps 1 Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d2 CL mode shooting speed the maximum frame rate when FX 36x24 1 0x or 5 4 30x24 is selected for image area M 79 is 4 fps 2 The maximum frame advance rate for CH is 5 fps when 1 2x 30x20 1 2x is selected for image area 3 Frame rates may drop at low temperatures or when the battery is low Frame rate drops at slow shutter speeds or when vibration reduction available with VR lenses or auto ISO sensitivity control is on 111 or when the battery is low Buffer Size The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter release button is pressed halfway The illustration at right shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 37 pictures The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession note however that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full 00 While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp will ligh
50. 7 shoot lt The camera will vary exposure and or flash level shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation see page 130 making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot No shots 3 increment 0 7 Display after first shot Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and m is no longer displayed The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset 193 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated 135 136 Exposure and Flash Bracketing In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed In self timer mode the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 133 each time the shutter release button is pressed regardless of the optio
51. AN w a Se E DS pr oy O t i EHC Fa 84 6 a gt a Item Description m No movie icon Indicates that movies can not be recorded 59 Headphone volume Volume of audio output to headphones 65 Microphone A eee sensitivity Microphone sensitivity for movie recording 65 Sound level for audio recording Displayed in red if level is too high adjust microphone Sound level sensitivity accordingly Left L and right R 65 channel indicators appear when optional ME 1 or other stereo microphone is used Time remaining The recording time available for movies 61 movie live view Movie frame size The frame size for movie recording 70 D Monitor brightness A monitor brightness indicator 65 indicator Guide A guide to the options available during 65 movie live view BE Adjusting Settings in the Live View Display Microphone sensitivity headphone volume and monitor brightness can be adjusted as described below Note that microphone sensitivity and headphone volume can not be adjusted during recording and that brightness affects the monitor only M 53 movies recorded with the camera are unaffected 3 1 Highlight a setting o Press and hold 9 and press lt or gt to highlight the indicator for the desired setting o amp button 2 Adjust the highlighted setting Keeping the 9 button pressed press A or to adjust the highlighted setting Using an External
52. Auto meter off delay Q 291 The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c2 If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point 1 Select Multiple SHOOTING MENU A HDR high dynamic range OFF exposure in the S Vionete control X Auto distortion control shooting menu Long ago NR ISO sensitivity setti Press the MENU button to a _ Interval timer shooting display the menus MENU button Highlight Multiple exposure in the shooting menu and press gt 195 196 2 Select a mode Multiple exposure a Highlight Multiple Multiple exposure mode OFF gt Number of shots 2 a mode and press i Highlight one of the Multiple exposure 7 fal Multiple exposure mode following and press e To take a series of multiple ONE On series exposures select N On Sp inste photo series Multiple exposure shooting will button continue until you select Off for Multiple exposure mode To take one multiple exposure select On single photo Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have created a single multiple exposure To exit without creating additional multiple exposures select Off If On series or On single photo is selected a
53. CPU lenses camera uses color matrix metering if focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data option in setup menu M 213 otherwise camera uses center weighted metering Center weighted Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area if CPU lens is attached size of area can be selected using Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area M 289 if non CPU lens is attached area is 12 mm in diameter Classic meter for portraits recommended when using filters with an exposure factor filter factor over 1x Spot Camera meters circle 4 mm 0 16 in in diameter approximately 1 5 of frame Circle is centered on current focus point making it possible to meter off center subjects if non CPU lens is used or if auto area AF is in effect camera will meter center focus point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background is much brighter or darker For improved precision with non CPU lenses specify lens focal length and maximum aperture in Non CPU lens data menu 213 115 fol 116 To choose a metering method rotate the metering selector until the desired setting is displayed in the viewfinder Metering selector J Viewfinder See Also For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method see Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure M 290
54. Clean image sensor Lock mirror up for cleaning and press gt E Image Dust Off ref photo HDMI Flicker reduction Time zone and date 5 Set time zone Time zone and date Time zone D d ti Select Time zone and press gt at aT Press lt or gt to highlight the i Daylight saving time OFF local time zone the UTC field ee encore apd shows the difference between the selected time zone and Time zone Coordinated Universal Time or UTC in hours and press London Casablanca UTC 0 01 01 2012 00 00 10 OKON 6 Turn daylight saving time Time zone and date Daylight saving time on or off i On Select Daylight saving time of E and press Daylight saving time is off by default if daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone press A to highlight On and press 7 Set the date and time Time zone and date Date and time Select Date and time and Ge Hae press Press lt q or P to select amp r1 1201 8 10m 100000 an item A or W to change Press when the clock is set to the current date and time 27 28 8 Set date format Time zone and date Date format Select Date format and press 4 gt Press A or W to choose the pa order in which the year month and day will be displayed and press 9 Exit to shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway 7 to exit to shooting mode The Clock Batter
55. E 100ND800 2 Fea Ea E fie Set Zoom MOK Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view E the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button to view images in other locations press button QE and select the desired card and folder as described on page 221 fe DSC_0001 JPG 10 01 2012 10 06 22 236 3 Select the highlighted g Delete picture on E 100ND800 100 1 100 2 100 3 Press the center of the multi a selector to select the F highlighted picture Selected oe ee pictures are marked by a icon Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional pictures to deselect a picture highlight it and press the center of the multi selector 4 Press to complete the operation Delete 3 images A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press button 237 238 e gt gt gt Connections Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to use the supplied UC E14 USB cable to connect the camera to a computer Before Connecting the Camera Before connecting the camera install the software on the supplied ViewNxX 2 installer CD To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera EN EL15 battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector available separately BE Supplied Software ViewN
56. EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 7 0 V 1 900 mAh Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Approx 40 x 56 x 20 5 mm 1 6 x 2 2 x 0 8 in Weight Approx 88 g 3 1 oz excluding terminal cover Supported Standards DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File System DCF is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera DPOF Digital Print Order Format DPOF is an industry wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card Exif version 2 3 The camera supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 3 a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks o
57. ESD L To display the menus Color space sRGB Active D Lighting OFF press the MENU button Highlight Manage MENU button Picture Control in the shooting menu and press gt 2 Select Save edit Manage Picture Control Highlight Save edit and press gt Load save 3 Select a Picture Control Manage Picture Control ica Choose Picture Control Highlight an existing Picture fe Control and press or press T EPT Portrai to proceed to Step 5 to save a copy of the highlighted Picture Se 5 Control without further modification 169 170 4 Edit the selected Picture Control a Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue See page 166 for more information To abandon any changes and start over from e a a default settings press the amt button Press amp when settings are complete E Select a destination Manase Picture Control a Save as Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press EC7 Unused Name the Picture Control Keyboard The text entry dialog shown ace at right will be displayed By default new Picture SACursor input COK Controls are named by adding a two digit number assigned automatically to the name of the existing Picture Control to use the default name proceed to Step 7 To move the cursor in the name area hold the amp 3 button and press lt or P To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use th
58. M 65 Connect the ME 1 to the camera microphone jack to record stereo sound while reducing the noise caused by lens vibration being recorded with movies during autofocus Remote terminal accessories The D800 is equipped with a ten pin remote terminal Q 3 for remote control and automatic photography The terminal is provided with a cap which protects the contacts when the terminal is not in use The following accessories can be used all lengths are approximate Remote Cord MC 22 Remote shutter release with blue yellow and black terminals for connection to a remote shutter triggering device allowing control via sound or electronic signals length 1 m 3 ft 3 in Remote Cord MC 30 Remote shutter release can be used to reduce camera shake length 80 cm 2 ft 7 in Remote Cord MC 36 Remote shutter release can be used for interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure length 85 cm 2 ft 9 in Extension Cord MC 21 Can be connected to ML 3 or MC series 20 22 23 25 30 or 36 Only one MC 21 can be used at a time length 3 m 9 ft 10 in Connecting Cord MC 23 Connects two cameras for simultaneous operation length 40 cm 1 ft 4 in Adapter Cord MC 25 Ten pin to two pin adapter cord for connection to devices with two pin terminals including the MW 2 radio control set MT 2 intervalometer and ML 2 modulite control set length 20 cm 8 in GPS Unit GP 1 M
59. Microphone The optional ME 1 stereo microphone can be used to record sound in stereo or to avoid recording lens noise caused by autofocus Headphones Third party headphones can be used Note that high sound levels may result in high volume particular care should be taken when headphones are used 65 66 The Information Display Movie Live View To hide or display indicators in the monitor during movie live view press the M button Virtual horizon CO 337 Information on Information off M Photo Shooting Info If View photo shooting info is selected for Custom Setting g1 Assign Fn button 321 g2 Assign preview button M 322 or g3 Assign AE L AF L button 2 323 pressing the selected button displays information on shutter speed aperture and other photo settings in place of movie recording information Press the button again to return to the movie recording display 19m55s 1001 tk Movie recording Photo shooting display information Image Area Regardless of the option selected for Image area in the shooting menu 79 all movies and photographs recorded in movie live view CQ 59 have an aspect ratio of 16 9 Images recorded with On selected for Image area gt Auto DX crop and a DX lens attached use a DX based movie format as do images recorded with DX 24x16 1 5x selected for Image area gt Choose image area Other images use an FX based movie format A
60. Movies When this option is selected interval timer photography M 201 is not available and any functions assigned to the shutter release button such as taking photographs measuring preset white balance and taking image dust off reference photos can not be used when is selected with the live view selector Select Take photos to use these options T The Setup Menu Camera Setup To display the setup menu press MENU and select the setup menu tab K hitii 4 SETUP MENU a SETUP MENU a aa 7 m Dust Off ref photo Flicker reduction Time zone and date MENU button Option an Option ian Format memory card 326 Wireless transmitter 245 Monitor brightness 326 Image comment 333 Clean image sensor 394 Copyright information 334 Lock mirror up for cleaning 397 Save load settings 335 Image Dust Off ref photo 327 GPS 218 HDMI 256 Virtual horizon 337 Flicker reduction 329 Non CPU lens data 212 Time zone and date 329 AF fine tune 338 Language 330 Eye Fi upload 339 Auto image rotation 331 Firmware version 340 Battery info 332 1 Not available when battery is low 2 Only available when compatible Eye Fi memory card is inserted 1 340 See Also Menu defaults are listed on page 410 325 Format Memory Card MENU button gt setup menu To begin formatting choose a memory card Format memory card slot and select Yes Note that formattin
61. NEF RAW recording Neutral Set Picture Control Nikon Transfer 2 cc sssscssssscssssecssseessees 239 No of copies PictBridge Setup menu 249 Noise reduction Non CPU lens Normal area AF Number of focus points 0 Optimal quality JPEG compression 86 Optional flash Overflow Overview data P Page Sizes anssi Perspective control Photo info PictBridge Picture Control Utility 172 Picture Controls 163 Picture size 378 Playback Playback display options Playback folder Playback information Playback menu Playback zoom Portrait Power connector M Predictive focus tracking Preset manual White balance 146 154 Press the shutter release button halfway Preview button Primary SlOUsieecestossstecssticcctncssrccreats Print DPOF sc sasssssssscsssssssssasssssssssssssaicses Print options PictBridge Setup menu 249 Print select a251 Printing sesse 247 Programmed auto 118 Protecting photographs 233 Q QUICK adjUst ssassn 166 Quick retOUCh s sssssssssssssesssessseseressresssese 357 R Rank items My Menu 369 Rear curtain sync 183 Recent settings 370 Red intensifier 348 Red eye correction 345 Red eye reduction sessssessccsssseeseesseee 183 Release button to use dial we 318 Release mode eccsssscsssesssssesssneecesneee
62. NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 277 When a flash is used the value selected for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 299 Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes available with the built in flash and the optional flash units listed on page 381 possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds 111 112 3 Adjust settings ISO sensitivity settings 5 ISO sensitivity 100 The maximum value for auto M Maxi itivit 6400 ISO sensitivity can be selected Minimum shutter speed AUTO using Maximum sensitivity the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100 note that if the value selected for Maximum sensitivity is lower than the value currently selected for ISO sensitivity the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will be used In exposure modes F and A sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed 4000 1 s or Auto in modes 5 and M ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the user If Auto available only with CPU lenses equivalent to 30 s when a non CPU lens is used is selected the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the focal length of the l
63. Q 195 or interval timer shooting M 201 disables HDR HDR is also disabled if you switch to a bank in which an NEF RAW option is selected for image quality Flash Photography Using the Built in Flash The built in flash has a Guide Number GN 12 39 m ft ISO 100 20 C 68 F and provides coverage for the angle of view of 24 mm lens or a 16 mm lens in DX format It can be used not only when natural lighting is inadequate but to fill in shadows and backlit subjects or to add a catch light to the subject s eyes 1 Choosea metering method 115 Select matrix or center weighted metering to activate i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected Metering selector 2 Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging When the flash is fully charged the flash ready indicator 4 will light 181 182 dial until the desired flash mode icon is displayed in the control panel M 183 3 Choose a flash mode Kg Press the 4 button and rotate the main command Ce 4 button Main command dial Control panel 4 Check exposure shutter speed and aperture Press the shutter release button halfway and check shutter speed and aperture The settings available when the built in flash is raised are listed in Shutter Speeds a
64. White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The White Balance Menu 1 Selecta white balance option in the shooting menu To display the menus press the MENU button Select White balance in the MENU button 3 Direct sunlight Flash Cloudy fix Shade GAdiust shooting menu then highlight a white balance option and press If an option other than Auto Fluorescent Choose color temp or Preset manual is selected proceed to Step 2 If Auto or Fluorescent is selected highlight a lighting type and press For information on fine tuning preset white balance see page 159 148 2 Fine tune white balance Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and the green G magenta M Coordinates Adjustment axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color temperature with each increment equivalent to about 5 mired The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters Increase green Green G n Blue B Amber A Increase magenta Magenta M Increase blue q ____ Increase amber 3 Press Press to save settings and return to O the shooting menu If white balance has been fine tuned an asterisk Xx
65. __ 7 eo al or Nikon Series E lenses A i dual Medical NIKKOR 120mm 5 z t a Y Y Vv z Reflex NIKKOR Y v w5 2 PC NIKKOR v gt Y W i i Al type Teleconverter v Y vys 2 PB 6 Bellows Focusing A m oO Attachment A y v v Auto extension rings PK series 11A 12 or 13 v Yvi v v py D 371 372 AUN fo 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR lenses Spot metering meters selected focus point 1 115 The camera s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and or tilting the lens or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used Can not be used with shifting or tilting Manual exposure mode only Can be used with AF S and AF I lenses only M 373 For information on the focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding see page 373 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80 200mm f 2 8 AF 35 70mm f 2 8 AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lt New gt or AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lens at maximum zoom in focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster Some l
66. activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 320 s Auto FP high speed sync is used when a compatible flash unit is attached M 382 If the built in flash or other flash 1 250s units are used shutter speed is set to 1 250 s When the Auto FP camera shows a shutter speed of 1 250 s in exposure mode F or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 250 s 1 250 s 1 60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter priority auto or manual exposure modes select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed 30s or bulb An X flash sync indicator will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel Auto FP High Speed Sync Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight The information display flash mode indicator shows FP when auto FP high speed sync is active M 185 299 EE Auto FP High Speed Sync When 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed 1 299 the built in flash can be used at shutter speeds as fast as 1 320 s or 250 s while compatible optional flash units 1 382 can be used at any shutter speed
67. an exposure allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by Qu pressing the ISO button and rotating the main command dial D Go EN until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel or a e A w viewfinder ISO button Main command fsofl ISO dial Control panel Viewfinder 109 110 The ISO Sensitivity Menu SHOOTING MENU ic ease HDR high dynami ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO SINNA sensitivity option in the shooting menu apy uti clstorttoncontrod Long exposure NR CO 268 High ISO NR LISO sensitivity settings es Multiple exposure OFF P Interval timer shooting OFF Note that ISO sensitivity can not be adjusted from the shooting menu in movie live view In exposure mode M ISO sensitivity can however be adjusted using the ISO button and main command dial 2 109 Hi 0 3 Hi 2 The settings Hi 0 3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 2 EV over ISO 6400 ISO 8000 25600 equivalent Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines Lo 0 3 Lo 1 The settings Lo 0 3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV below ISO 100 ISO 80 50 equivalent Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright Contrast is slightly higher than normal in most cases ISO sensitivities of ISO 100 or above are recommended See Also For
68. and minutes appears in the shutter speed display immediately before each frame is recorded At other times the time remaining can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay N 291 the exposure meters will not turn off during shooting Frame size frame rate To view current time lapse photography Time lapse photography settings press the MENU button between shots aia While time lapse photography is in progress the P amp 00 0130 In progress time lapse photography menu will show the 02 0000 00 00 0 00 02 7 interval and the time remaining These settings can not be changed while time lapse photography is in progress nor can pictures be played back or other menu settings adjusted EE Interrupting Time Lapse Photography Time lapse photography will end automatically if the battery is exhausted The following will also end time lapse photography e Selecting Start gt Off in the Time lapse photography menu e Pressing the button between frames or immediately after a frame is recorded e Turning the camera off e Removing the lens e Connecting a USB or HDMI cable e Inserting a memory card into an empty slot e Pressing the shutter release button all the way down to take a photograph A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where time lapse photography ended Note that time laps
69. and off during exposure preview M 46 See Also For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector see Custom Setting f2 Multi selector center button M 309 57 58 e j c Movie Live View Movies can be recorded in live view 1 Rotate the live view selector to movie live view 2 Press the button The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor modified for the effects of exposure The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder button I The Icon A B amp Q icon M 64 indicates that movies can not be recorded Before Recording Before recording choose a color space M 274 and Picture Control 163 White balance can be set at any time by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial 145 3 Choose a focus mode Sc Gy Choose a focus mode as described in Choosing a Focus Mode 1 48 amt Pies r56 200 59 60 4 Choose an AF area mode Choose an AF Area mode as described in Choosing an AF Area Mode M 49 IAF i 5 Focus Frame the opening shot and focus as described in Steps 3 and 4 on pages 45 46 for more information on focusing in movie live view see page 47 Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in face priority AF drops in movie live view Exposure
70. area AF is chosen and the center focus point is selected The AF assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus Off operation The camera may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor The AF Assist Illuminator The AF assist illuminator has a range of about 0 5 3 0 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in when using the illuminator use a lens with a focal length of 24 200 mm and remove the lens hood See Also See page 377 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist b Metering Exposure b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making b1 ISO sensitivity step value adjustments to ISO sensitivity 1 109 If possible the current ISO sensitivity setting is iste maintained when the step value is changed aa If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value ISO sensitivity will be rounded to the nearest available setting b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl Menu button Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making bZEV steps for exposure cnt adjustments to shutter speed aperture and bracketing 1 2 step 1 step b3 Exp Flash Comp Step Value nEn button gt Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making b3Exp lash comp step value adjustments to exposure and flash compensation S 1 2 step 1 step 287 b4 Easy Exposure Co
71. assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF VR Zoom Nikkor 80 400mm f 4 5 5 6D ED Calculating Angle of View The D800 can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm 135 format cameras If Auto DX crop is on Q 79 and a 35mm format lens is attached the angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35mm film 35 9 x 24 0 mm if a DX lens is attached the angle of view will automatically be adjusted to 23 4 x 15 6 mm DX format To choose an angle of view different from that of the current lens turn Auto DX crop off and select from FX 36x24 1 2x 30x20 DX 24x 16 and 5 4 30x24 Ifa 35mm format lens is attached the angle of view could be reduced by 1 5 x by selecting DX 24x 16 or by 1 2 x by selecting 1 2x 30x20 to expose a smaller area or the aspect ratio could be changed by selecting 5 4 30x24 FX 36x 24 picture size 35 9 x 24 0 mm equivalent to 35mm format camera 1 2x 30x20 picture size 30 0 x 19 9 mm DX 24x 16 picture size 23 4 x 15 6 mm equivalent to DX format camera 5 4 30x24 picture size 30 0 x 24 0 mm Picture diagonal Angle of view FX 36x24 35mm format Angle of view 1 2x 30x 20 Angle of view DX 24x 16 DX format Angle of view 5 4 30x 24 Calculating Angle of View Continued The DX 24x 16 angle of view is about 1 5 times smaller than the 35mm format angle of view
72. buttons or multi selector are pressed area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border Press to cancel zoom If the camera detects red eye in the selected photograph a copy will be created that has been processed to reduce its effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye Zoom in Cancel zoom amp Create copy S 345 Trim MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create a cropped copy of the selected M3840x2560 B2 Aspect photograph The selected photograph is m displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow create a cropped copy as described in i XX the following table To Use Description Reduce size of crop Press to reduce the size of the crop Increase size of crop Press amp to increase the size of the crop Change crop Rotate the main command dial to switch J between aspect ratios of 3 2 4 3 5 4 1 1 aspect ratio and 16 9 and hold to move the crop rapidly to the desired position Position crop qE E A Use multi selector to position the crop Press Press center of multi selector to preview Preview crop cropped image Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file Trim Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG or TIFF RGB photos have an image quality 84 of JPEG fine cropped copies created from JPEG
73. camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image bracketing the value currently selected for white balance See page 137 for more information Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500 K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue The camera white balance options are adapted to the following color temperatures u sodium vapor lamps 2 700 K z incandescent warm white fluorescent direct sunlight 5 200 K 4 flash 5 400 K cloudy 6 000 K 3 000 K daylight fluorescent 6 500 K white fluorescent 3 700 K high temp mercury vapor cool white fluorescent 7 200 K 4 200 K amp shade 8 000 K tm day white fluorescent 5 000 K 147 Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image
74. cleaning or inspection immediately vV Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D800 however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 available separately m 389 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications vV Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and serv
75. damage to the product be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation Z Observe proper precautions when handling the charger Keep dry Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth Continued use could result in fire Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power cable Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed take the power cable to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another
76. e SB 910 and SB 900 AF assist illumination is available with 17 135 mm AF lenses however autofocus is available only with the focus points shown at right SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 AF assist illumination is available with 24 105 mm AF lenses however autofocus is available only with the focus points shown at right B 700 AF assist illumination is available with 24 135 mm AF lenses however autofocus is available only with the focus points shown at right 000900000 000900000 o o 00000000000 o 00000000000 900590000 o 20 105 mm 106 135 mm 000000000 17 19 mm oo ao 00000 00000 00000 o 00000 00000 00000 a ooooo w T A o 3 3 50 105 mm o o a a oooo0o0000 00000000000 o o o G 24 27 mm 28 135 mm In exposure mode F the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 4 5 5 6 7 1 8 10 11 If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens Flash Control Mode The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash units as follows Flash sync Auto FP 2 300 i TTL Ta ree FP Auto aperture AA i BA AA FP Non TTL auto flash A a va FP Dista
77. effects of noise 4175 Photos are blotched or smeared e Clean lens e Clean low pass filter N 394 Colors are unnatural e Adjust white balance to match light source M 145 Adjust Set Picture Control settings M 163 Can not measure white balance Subject is too dark or too bright Q 157 Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance Image was not created with D800 CO 158 White balance bracketing unavailable NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image quality option selected for image quality OQ 84 e Multiple exposure mode is in effect 1 195 Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image A auto is selected for sharpening contrast or saturation For consistent results over a series of photographs choose a setting other than A auto 167 Metering can not be changed Autoexposure lock or movie live view is in effect 1 59 129 Exposure compensation can not be used Choose exposure mode F or A 2 131 Sound is not recorded with movies Microphone off is selected for Movie settings gt Microphone M 70 BE Playback NEF RAW image is not played back Photo was taken at image quality of NEF JPEG 85 Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras Pictures recorded with other makes of camera may not be displayed correctly Some photos are not displayed during playback Select All for Playback folder 260 Tall portrait orientation photos are displayed in
78. eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete The Shutter Release Button The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down Fo Focus Take photograph 41 42 Auto Meter Off The shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds reducing the drain on the battery Press the shutter release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder Q 41 6s Exposure meters on Exposure meters off Exposure meters on The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay m 291 The Multi Selector The multi selector can be used to select the focus point while the exposure meters are on CO 96 Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted the memory card icon and number of exposures remaining will be displayed some memory cards may in rare cases only display this information when the camera is on Control panel Viewing Photographs 1 Press the A bu
79. frequency of the local power supply 1 125 s 1 60 s or 1 30 s for 60 Hz 100 s 1 50 s or 1 25 s for 50 Hz Time Zone and Date MENU button gt Y setup menu Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off Q 27 Option Description Choose a time zone The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone Date and time Set the camera clock Time zone Choose the order in which the day month and year are Date format displayed Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off Daylight saving time blinks in the control panel when the clock is not set 329 330 Language MENU button gt setup menu Choose a language for camera menus and messages The following options are available e tina Czech Pycckuit Russian Dansk Danish Romana Romanian Deutsch German Suomi Finnish English English Svenska Swedish Espa ol Spanish T rk e Turkish Fran ais French Ykpa Hcbka Ukrainian Indonesia Indonesian Arabic Italiano Italian HX 38 Traditional Chinese Nederlands Dutch FASC E Simplified Chinese Norsk Norwegian AAG Japanese Polski Polish 2 Korean Portugu s Portuguese menina Thai Auto Image Rotation MENU button gt Y setup menu Photographs
80. information on Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value see page 287 For information on displaying ISO sensitivity in the control panel or adjusting ISO sensitivity without using the ISO button see Custom Setting d7 ISO display and adjustment 295 For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities see page 277 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt Auto ISO sensitivity control in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user ISO sensitivity is adjusted appropriately when the flash is used 1 Select Auto ISO sensitivity control for ISO sensitivity settings in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity settings 5 ISO sensitivity 100 7 nA Auto ISO sensitivity control OFF gt 000 To display the menus press MENU button the MENU button Select ISO sensitivity settings in the shooting menu highlight Auto ISO sensitivity control and press P 2 Select On Highlight On and press if Off is selected ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user ISO sensitivity settings fa Auto ISO sensitivity control button Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO
81. is fully charged before copying movies If the destination folder contains an image with File with same name the same name as one of the images to be Sean cs copied a confirmation dialog will be displayed Select Replace existing image to replace the image with the image to be copied or select Skip Replace all to replace all existing images with the same names without further prompting To continue without replacing the image select Skip or select Cancel to exit without copying any further images Hidden or protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced Protect status is copied with the images but print marking M 254 is not Hidden images can not be copied Image Review MENU button gt Cl playback menu Choose whether pictures are automatically p mese review displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting If Off is selected pictures can only be displayed by pressing the P button 265 After Delete MENU button gt playback menu Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted Option Description Show Display following picture If deleted picture was last frame next previous picture will be displayed Show Display previous picture If deleted picture was first frame previous following picture will be displayed If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded following picture will be displayed as described for Show next If u
82. is selected for Auto DX crop 1 All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100 Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression ISO sensitivity is set to Hi 0 3 or higher High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or ISO sensitivity is set to ISO 1600 or higher or long exposure noise reduction Active D Lighting or auto distortion control is on 3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly d3 Max Continuous Release M 293 WI The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100 Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with fully charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used In the case of AA batteries capacity also varies with make and storage conditions some batteries can not be used Sample figures for the camera and optional MB D12 multi power battery pack are given below CIPA standard One EN EL15 battery camera Approximately 900 shots One EN EL15 battery MB D12 Approximately 900 shots One EN EL18 battery MB D12 Approximately 1 400 shots Eight AA alkaline batteries MB D12 Approximately 1 000 shots Nikon standard 2 On
83. is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal output range for the HDMI device you can choose from the following options Output range Limited range For devices with an RGB video signal input range of 16 to 235 Choose this option if you notice loss of detail in shadows Full range For devices with an RGB video signal input range of 0 to 255 Choose this option if shadows are washed out or too bright Output display Choose horizontal and vertical frame coverage for HDMI size output from 95 or 100 If Off is selected when the camera is connected to an HDMI device shooting information will not be displayed in the monitor during live view photography Live view on screen display 257 258 Television Playback Use of an EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector available separately is recommended for extended playback Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen Slide Shows The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback m 267 Audio Stereo sound recorded with optional ME 1 65 389 stereo microphones plays in stereo when movies are viewed on HDMI devices using a camera connected via an HDMI cable note that audio will not be played back over headphones connected to the camera Volume can be adjusted using television controls the camera controls can not be used HDMI and Live View When the came
84. keep shutter speed and or aperture locked at the selected values 127 Autoexposure AE Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using center weighted metering and spot metering to meter exposure Note that matrix metering will not produce the desired results 1 Lock exposure Shutter release button Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway With the f shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point press the Art AE L AF L button to E lock exposure if you are using i autofocus confirm that the in focus jE indicator appears in the viewfinder Art AE L AF L button While exposure lock is in effect an AE L indicator will appear in the viewfinder Comyjies ssr ou fel 2 Recompose the photograph Keeping the t AE L AF L button pressed recompose the photograph and shoot 128 Metered Area In spot metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 4 mm 0 16 in circle centered on the selected focus point In center weighted metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 12 mm circle in the center of the viewfinder Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be changed without altering the metered value for exposure Exposu
85. maximum aperture of the lens Enables color matrix metering note that it may be necessary to use center weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses including Reflex NIKKOR lenses e Improves the precision of center weighted and spot metering and i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and the lens Note that lens data are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out The data for different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers or the data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted The camera can store data for up to nine non CPU lenses To enter or edit data for a non CPU lens 1 Select Non CPU lens data in the setup menu Press the MENU button to display the menus MENU button Highlight Non CPU lens data in the setup menu and press SETUP MENU Virtual horizon Non CPU lens data AF fine tune Firmware version c Le Ej i 2 Select a lens number NonrCPU lens data Highlight Lens number and press lt or P to choose a lens A Focal length mm Maximum aperture number be
86. not displayed when Picture Controls are adjusted NEF RAW processing NORM Image quality V 84 Image size 1 87 AUTO White balance M 145 0 0 Exposure comp M 130 FANL Picture Control M 163 ISONEIOFF High ISO NR M 277 iCancel Zoom OKLO Vignette control M 275 D Lighting M 344 4 Copy the photograph Highlight EXE and press amp to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph To exit without copying the photograph press the DaT CTS Pe RM MENU button button arr 354 Resize MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create small copies of selected photographs 1 Select Resize To resize selected images press MENU to display the menus and select Resize in the retouch menu a RETOUCH MENU Resize 7 Quick retouch Straighten z Distortion control E Fisheye Color outline Color sketch Perspective control 2 Choose a destination If two memory cards are inserted you can choose a destination for the resized copies by highlighting Choose destination and pressing gt if only one memory card is inserted proceed to Step 3 The menu shown at right will be displayed highlight a card slot and press Resize Select image fe pchoose destination Choose size Resize Choose destination SD card slot CF card slot 3 Choose a size Highlight Choose size and press b gt Resize Select image fie Choose destination O
87. number in the current folder whichever is higher If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001 File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is Off inserted in the camera Note that a new folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs As for On except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder If the folder is empty file numbering is reset to 0001 Reset M File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d5 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card 294 d6 Viewfinder Grid Display MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose On to display on demand grid lines in RRR the viewfinder for reference when composing photographs 8 d7 ISO Display and Adjustment MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Show ISO sensitivity or Show ISO Easy ISO is selected the control panel will show ISO sensitivity in place of the n
88. number of exposures have been ata cata taken select Off for multiple exposure mode once If shooting ends before the specified number OCTA Off of exposures have been taken a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e Atwo button reset is performed M 193 e The camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted 199 m Multiple Exposure Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view Taking photographs in live view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off The information listed in the playback photo information display including date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and interval timer shooting will end if On single photo is selected for multiple exposure mode multiple exposure shooting wil
89. off automatically after the photograph is taken The i icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends 179 180 vV Framing HDR Photographs The edges of the image may be cropped out The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting Use of a tripod is recommended Depending on the scene shadows may appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark objects this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of smoothing The BKT Button If HDR high dynamic range is selected for Custom Setting f8 Assign BKT button M 316 you can select the HDR mode by pressing the BKT button and rotating the main command dial and the exposure differential by pressing the BKT button and rotating the sub command dial The mode and exposure differential are shown in the control panel i and I appear when On series is selected and M when On single photo is selected no icon appears when HDR is off Rute Interval Timer Photography If On series is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting begins the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the selected interval if On single photo is selected interval timer shooting will end after a single shot Ending HDR photography ends interval timer shooting Shooting Menu Banks HDR settings can be adjusted separately for each bank M 269 but switching to a bank in which HDR is active during multiple exposure
90. or with DC to AC inverters Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire A A Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations CD ROMs CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment Do not aim a flash at the operator of a motor vehicle Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents Observe caution when using the flash Using the camera with the flash in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns Using the flash close to the subject s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment Particular care should be observed when photographing infants when the flash should be no less than one meter 39 in from the subject Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth XV xvi Notices No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without Nikon s prior written permi
91. or coupon tickets except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company Also do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government licenses issued by public agencies and private groups ID cards and tickets such as passes and meal coupons Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books music paintings woodcuts prints maps drawings movies and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party on Nikon Nik PHIN uOYIN uo rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more informat
92. or manually 2 101 The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus M 96 or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing M 98 Autofocus To use autofocus rotate the focus mode selector to AF Focus mode selector Autofocus Mode Choose from the following autofocus modes Mode Description Single servo AF For stationary subjects Focus locks when shutter release button is pressed halfway At default settings shutter can only be released when in focus indicator is displayed focus priority Q 282 Continuous servo AF For moving subjects Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button is pressed halfway if subject moves camera will engage predictive focus tracking 92 to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary At default settings shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus release priority Q 281 AF S AF C 91 92 Autofocus mode can be selected by pressing the AF mode button and rotating the main command dial until the desired AF mode button setting is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel Main command dial Control panel Viewfinder The AF 0N Button For the purpose of focusing the camera AF ON button pressing the AF ON button has the same effect as pressing the shutter release button D halfway o do BL Predictive Focus
93. photo Highlight one of the following options and press To exit without acquiring image dust off data press MENU button Start The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will appear in the viewfinder and control a a panel displays Focus wil be setto infinity Clean sensor and then start Select this option to clean the image sensor before starting The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will appear in the viewfinder and control rer panel displays when cleaning is complete E Start Clean sensor and then start m Image Sensor Cleaning Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Select Clean image sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs 327 2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters four inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button halfway In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when
94. photographing subjects that are moving predictably e g runners or race cars on a track 21 point dynamic area AF Choose when photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably e g players at a football game 51 point dynamic area AF Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder e g birds 3D tracking Select the focus point as described on page 96 In AF C focus mode the camera will track subjects that leave the selected focus point and select new focus points as required Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis players If the subject leaves viewfinder remove your finger from the shutter release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point 93 94 Auto area AF The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus point if a face is detected the camera will give priority to the portrait subject The active focus points are highlighted briefly after the camera focuses in AF C mode the main focus point remains highlighted after the other focus points have turned off u AF area mode can be D selected by pressing the ia AF mode button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel AF mode button Sub command dial
95. photos have the same image quality as the original The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left in the crop display 3 2 Aspect PERCU OKT Viewing Cropped Copies Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed 346 Monochrome MENU button gt gi retouch menu Copy photographs in Black and white Monochrome Sepia or Cyanotype blue and white monochrome Sepia Cyanotype Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype Increase displays a preview of the selected saturation image press A to increase color K 4 gt saturation W to decrease Press fa O D to create a monochrome copy 4 y S Decrease Darker lishter MSave saturation 347 Filter Effects MENU button gt gh retouch menu Choose from the following filter effects After adjusting filter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the picture less blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Creates a copy with warm tone filter Warm effects giving the copy a warm red filter cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Skylight Red intensifier Intensify reds Red intensifier greens Green Green intensifier or blues Blue intensifier intensifier Press A to increase the Blue effect W to decrease intensifier Darker Olighter MSav
96. retouch options for the options available with photographs see page 341 or see page 74 for the options available with movies Rotate Tall To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu 266 NORMAL 0x4912 Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu 265 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting because the camera is already in the correct orientation images are not rotated automatically during image review In continuous release mode display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in the current series displayed Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted you can select a memory card for playback by pressing the 9 button when 72 thumbnails are displayed The dialog shown at right will be displayed Highlight mamas ye the desired slot and press gt to display a list of folders then highlight a folder and press to view the pictures in the selected folder The same method can be used to choose a slot when selecting images for operations in the playback 1 259 or retouch menus M 341 or when choosing an image as the source for preset white balance N 159 Resuming Shooting To turn the monitor off and return to shooting mode press gt or press the shutter release button halfway The Multi Selector The multi selector can be
97. selected focus will not lock when AF C is selected for autofocus mode The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released 281 282 a2 AF S Priority Selection MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When AF S A 91 is selected for viewfinder photography this option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus focus priority or whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority in single servo AF Option Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release Release button is pressed ed Focus Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator is displayed Regardless of the option selected if the in focus indicator is displayed when AF S is selected for autofocus mode focus will lock while the shutter release button is pressed halfway Focus lock continues until the shutter is released a3 Focus Tracking with Lock On_ wen button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject when AF C 1 91 is selected during viewfinder photography Option Description AFE 5 Long _______ _ When the distance to the subject changes abruptly the AFE 4 camera waits for the specified period before adjusting AF 3 Normal the distance to the subject This prevents the camera AFE 2 from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by
98. socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 Dimensions weight Dimensions Wx Hx D Approx 146 x 123 x 81 5 mm 5 7 x 4 8 x 3 2 in Weight Approx 1 000 g 2 Ib 3 3 oz with battery and SD memory card but without body cap approx 900 g 1 Ib 15 7 oz camera body only Operating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity Less than 85 no condensation Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain MH 25 battery charger Rated input in North America AC 120 V 60 Hz 0 2 A eaten AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 0 23 0 12 A Rated output DC 8 4 V 1 2 A Supported batteries Nikon EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion batteries Charging time Approx 2 hours and 35 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F when no charge remains Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Approx 91 5 x 33 5 x 71 mm 3 6 x 1 3 x 2 8 in excluding projections Length of cord Approx 1 8 m 6 ft U S A and Canada or 1 5 m 4 9 ft other countries Weight Approx 110 g 3 9 oz excluding power cable and AC wall adapter EN
99. supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the MH 25 only Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not in use A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement Purchase a new EN EL15 battery 23 Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF S NIKKOR 24 120mm f 4G ED VR Focal length scale index Mounting index Ey Rear lens cap Focus mode switch 25 101 Focal length scale Lens hood Vibration reduction ON OFF switch Zoom ring Vibration reduction mode switch Focus ring 1 101 1 Turn the camera off 2 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap 24 3 Attach the lens Keeping the mounting index on the lens aligned with the mounting index on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount O Being careful not to press the lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it If the lens is equipped with an A M or M A M mode switch select A autofocus or M A autofocus with manual override Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release button D w
100. taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback M 266 or when viewed in ViewNX 2 supplied or in Capture NX 2 available separately N 389 The following orientations are recorded Landscape wide Camera rotated 90 Camera rotated 90 orientation clockwise counter clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu 266 331 332 Battery Info MENU button gt setup menu View information on the battery currently Battery info inserted in the camera Charge No of shots Patter age 0 4 Item Description Charge The current battery level expressed as a percentage No of shots The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph for example when measuring preset white balance Calibration e This item is displayed only when the camera is powered by an optional MB D12 battery pack equipped with an EN EL18 available separately e CAL Due to repeated use and recharging calib
101. the 19 Customize command dials command dials when they are used to Reverse etaton make adjustments to Exposure A favre compensation and or Shutter speed Exposure compensation aperture Highlight options and press nan rotation the multi selector right to select or deselect then highlight Done and press This setting also applies to the command dials for optional MB D12 multi power battery packs If Off is selected the main command 19 Customize command dials dial controls shutter speed and the sub iyisi command dial controls aperture IfOn W ax is selected the main command dial will ONA On Mode A Change o maih s b control aperture and the sub command dial shutter speed If On Mode A is selected the main command dial will be used to set aperture in exposure mode fA only This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D12 If Sub command dial is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main command dial if On is selected for Change main sub If Aperture Aperture ring is selected aperture can only be adjusted with setting the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub command dial Note that regardless of the setting chosen the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non CPU lens is attached 317 Option Description If Off is selected
102. the comment as described on page _ 1__ 170 iklmnoparstuvwx BCursor lnput MOK Protecting a White Balance Preset Follow the steps below to protect the selected white balance preset Protected presets can not be modified and the Fine tune and Edit comment options can not be used 1 Select PRE Preset manual White balance KI Choose color temp o PRE Preset manual gt Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu M 158 and press P Adjust 2 Selecta preset White balance Highlight the desired preset 7 E and press the center of the EA ya multi selector 1 DSelect_ MOK 3 Select Protect Highlight Protect and press gt Fn Edit comment Select image Protect d 1 4 Select On White balance fal Protect Highlight On and press to protect the selected white balance preset To remove protection select Off button 161 162 Image Enhancement Picture Controls Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings including sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue among compatible devices and software Selecting a Picture Control The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene Option Description ESD Standard Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations ENL Neut
103. the connector is not in use Windows To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2 select All Programs gt Link to Nikon from the Windows start menu Internet connection required 241 242 vV System Requirements Windows CPU Photos JPEG movies Intel Celeron Pentium 4 or Core series 1 6 GHz or better H 264 movies playback 3 0 GHz or better Pentium D Intel Core i5 or better recommended when viewing movies with a frame size of 1 280 x 720 or more at a frame rate of 30 fps or above or movies with a frame size of 1 920 x 1 080 or more H 264 movies editing 2 6 GHz or better Core 2 Duo os Pre installed versions of Windows 7 Home Basic Home Premium Professional Enterprise Ultimate Service Pack 1 Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate Service Pack 2 or 32 bit editions of Windows XP Home Edition Professional Service Pack 3 All installed programs run as 32 bit applications in 64 bit editions of Windows 7 and Windows Vista RAM Windows 7 Windows Vista 1 GB or more 2 GB or more recommended Windows XP 512 MB or more 2 GB or more recommended Hard disk space A minimum of 500 MB available on the startup disk 1 GB or more recommended Monitor Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels XGA or more 1280 x 1024 pixels SXGA or more recommended Color 24 bit color True Color or more Mac 0S CPU Photos JPEG m
104. the shutter release button is pressed If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to n 2 Exposure settings are not acquire Image Dust Off reference data a eae and the message shown at right will be and try again displayed Choose another reference object and repeat the process from Step 1 m Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera 328 Flicker Reduction MENU button gt setup menu Reduce flicker and banding when shooting Flicker reduction under fluorescent or mercury vapor lighting during live view or movie recording Choose PP ato E Auto to allow the camera to automatically aol choose the correct frequency or manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power supply M Flicker Reduction If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best results Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright in which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture larger f number To prevent flicker select mode M and choose a shutter speed adapted to the
105. this option to Image comment attach the comment to all subsequent photographs Attach comment can be oe turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing gt 333 Copyright Information MENU button gt Y setup menu Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo information display M 228 and can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 supplied or in Capture NX 2 available separately N 389 Done Save changes and return to the setup menu Artist Enter a photographer name as described on page 170 Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long Copyright Enter the name of the copyright holder as described on page 170 Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long Attach copyright information Select this Copyright information option to attach copyright information to all Done subsequent photographs Attach EA AIKON Taro copyright information can be turned on n and off by highlighting it and pressing gt E vV Copyright Information To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright information option 334
106. time lapse movies are recorded to the memory card selected for Movie settings gt Destination CQ 70 Start e 4 On ok gt m Time Lapse Photography Time lapse is not available in live view I 45 59 at a shutter speed of kus amp 124 when bracketing Q 132 High Dynamic Range HDR m 176 multiple exposure M 195 or interval timer photography 201 is active Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take one shot at each interval The self timer can not be used 209 210 Calculating the Length of the Final Movie The total number of frames in the final movie Length recorded can be calculated by dividing the shooting time maximum length by the interval and rounding up The length of Time lapse phl Fosraphy the final movie can then be calculated by diving the number of shots by the frame rate selected for Movie settings gt Frame size frame rate A 48 frame movie recorded at 1920 x 1080 24 fps for example will be about two seconds long The maximum length for movies recorded using Memory card time lapse photography is 20 minutes indicator Cover the Viewfinder To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter Z 106 During Shooting During time lapse photography a icon will blink and the time lapse recording indicator will be displayed in the control panel The time remaining in hours
107. use focus lock to recompose the photograph Focus lock is most effective when an option other than auto area AF is selected for AF area mode M 93 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus point and press v the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder 98 Lock focus AF C focus mode M 91 With the Shutter release button shutter release button pressed halfway press the at AE L AF L button to lock both focus and exposure an AE L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder Focus will remain locked while the ft AE L AF L button is pressed even if you ee later remove your finger from ai AE L AF L button the shutter release button tases FB F e150 37 AF S focus mode Focus locks automatically when the in focus indicator appears and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter release button Focus can also be locked by pressing the ffi AE L AF L button see above 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots if you keep the shutter release button pressed halfway AF S or keep the t AE L AF L button pressed allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect If the
108. used to Delete highlight pictures in the thumbnail CEE display and in displays like that shown asl EA T 100 2 100 3 at right Set Zoom MOK See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay M 292 For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector see Custom Setting f2 Multi selector center button M 309 For information on using the command dials for image or menu navigation see Custom Setting f9 Custom command dials gt Menus and playback Z 318 221 Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that image only shooting data RGB histograms and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback display options 0 261 GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken WAY NIKON D800 ES hee 1 125 F5 6 100 sRGB A X 4 B 100ND800 DSC_0001 JPG _ sw ND800 DSC_0001 JPG 10 01 2012 10 06 22 7360x4912 10 06 22 foals VEU File information None image only LATITUDE aN LONGITUDE 139 43 696 ALTITUDE 2350 TIME UTC 10 01 2012 201215200 2105 17 Ja NGA 35 35 971 WTR SPD AP 1 125 F5 6 EXP MODE 150 FOCAL LENGTH
109. wel Add items Remove items Rank items EB Choose tab fiz 2 Select 8 Recent 7 Choose tab settings CE W Menu Highlight Recent PALS Recent settings Gal settings and press The name of the menu will change from MY MENU to RECENT SETTINGS button Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used To view My Menu again select i My Menu for Recent settings gt Choose tab Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu To remove an item from the recent settings menu highlight it and press the button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press t mm again to delete the selected item i Technical Notes Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories cleaning and storing the camera and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera e Compatible Lenses camera setting Focus mode Exposure Metering system mode AF a aE A Lens accessory rangefinder 5 1 3D Color AE Type G or D AF NIKKOR 3 AF S AF I NIKKOR K CLIE E m PC E NIKKOR series v Y5 e gt c PC Micro 85mm Cc 5 6 a5 oy f 2 8D4 ee AF S AF I Teleconverter Y Vv YV vi vi v Other AF NIKKOR 7 except lenses for F3AF K K CEE E a Ie Al P NIKKOR vl ViVviVv iVv v Al Al modified NIKKOR
110. 0 card firmware is up Ar d Camera can not to dat L i 7 Err control Eye Fi Copy files on Eye Fi 29 239 blinks card card to a computer or other device and format card or insert new card Memory cardis locked ae lock Fir d Memory card is a write 6D locked write sition blinks protected Slide card write p EPF protect switch to 34 Notavailableif Eye Fi card is write position z Err 3 Eye Fi card is SD locked write locked blinks protected Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution am gt i Memory card has This card is not y Format memory card F a r not been 29 32 formatted or insert new memory blinks formatted for use 326 Format the card card in camera Failed to update flash unit firmware Flash cannot be Pate for flash Contact a Nikon unit mounted on used authorized service camera was not Contact a Nikon representative i updated correctly authorized service representative The internal Wait for the internal Unable to start sos Ba ot temperature of circuits to cool before live view Please z i 56 69 the camera is resuming live view or wait A 3 high movie recording Select folder No images on containing images Folder contains memory card orin from Playback folder a f 29 260 no images folder s selected menu or insert for playback memory card contai
111. 10 08 press A or W to change eoo aion Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed Press gt to continue 4 Choose the number of Interval timer shooting t l d b f Select no of times no of shots intervals and number o 4 DOB om shots per interval Press lt or gt to highlight number of intervals or number of shots press A or W to W7 UVU VI change Press gt to continue iS 003 X 2 0006 Numberof Number Total intervals of shots number of interval shots M Before Shooting Select a release mode other than self timer or Mup when using the interval timer Before beginning interval timer photography take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor Before choosing a starting time select Time zone and date in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date 1 27 Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted be sure the camera EN EL15 battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector available separately 5 start shooting Interval timer shooting Start a On Highlight On and press Off to return to the shooting menu without starting the interval timer highlight Off and press The first button series of shots will be take
112. 158 White Balance Presets Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks 1 269 A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank Measuring Preset White Balance Preset manual white balance can not be measured during live view 45 59 while you are shooting an HDR photograph 2 176 or multiple exposure M 195 or when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 Assign shutter button M 324 154 Measuring a Value for White Balance 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in exposure mode adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows 0 M 123 2 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the control panel WB button Main command dial Control panel 3 Selecta preset Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired white balance preset d 1 to d 4 is displayed in the control panel we PRE WB button Sub command dial Control panel 155 156 4 Select di
113. 200mm f 3 5 ED e Lenses that require the AU 1 focusing AF Teleconverter TC 16 unit 400mm f 4 5 600mm f 5 6 PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 800mm f 8 1200mm f 11 or earlier e Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 851001 906200 2 1cm f 4 PC 35mm f 3 5 old type Extension Ring K2 180 600mm f 8 ED serial numbers Reflex 1000mm f 6 3 old type Reflex 1000mm f 11 serial numbers 174041 174180 142361 143000 360 1200mm f 11 ED serial numbers Reflex 2000mm f 11 serial numbers 174031 174127 200111 200310 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 The Built in Flash The built in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 24mm 16mm in DX format to 300mm although in some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to shadows cast by the lens while lenses that block the subject s view of the red eye reduction lamp may interfere with red eye reduction Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below Minimum distance Lens Zoom position without vignetting 2 ae ee 1222mm 18 24mm_ No vignetting X AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 17 55mm 20mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in
114. 4 Adjust gain Image overlay M Image1 Image2 Preview Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 o 4 d and optimize exposure for the IEF overlay by pressing A or to 6 E 2 es select the gain from values Woon select between 0 1 and 2 0 Repeat for the second image The default value is 1 0 select 0 5 to halve gain or 2 0 to double it The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column 351 352 5 Preview the overlay Image overlay Overlay Press lt or gt to place the cursor in the Preview column and press A or to highlight Overlay Press to preview X EBak save the overlay as shown at right to save the overlay without displaying a preview select Save To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain press QE 6 Savethe overlay ry Press while the preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is N J E 100ND800 DSC_0013 JPG 01 2012 17 24 10 5 created the resulting i o NORMAL 7360x4912 image will be displayed button full frame in the monitor m Image Overlay Only NEF RAW photographs with the same image area and bit depth can be combined The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture exposure mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation and values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1 The current image comment is
115. 5 battery charger before use About 2 hours and 35 minutes are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains 1 Connect the AC power cable P Connect the power cable The AC adapter plug should be in the position 4 shown at right do not rotate D 2 Remove the terminal cover Remove the terminal cover from the battery 3 Insert the battery Place the battery in the battery bay as shown in the illustration on the charger 19 4 Plug the charger in The CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery charges m Charging the Battery Charge the battery indoors at ambient The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 C 32 F or above 60 C 140 F temperatures between 5 35 C 41 95 F Battery Charging charging complete RV CHARGE PJN TA 5 Remove the battery when charging is complete 20 Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blinking Unplug the charger and remove the battery The AC Wall Adapter Depending on the country or region of purchase an AC wall adapter may also be supplied with the charger To use the adapter insert it into the charger AC inlet Slide the AC wall adapter latch in the direction shown and rotate the adapter 90 to fix it in the position shown Reverse these steps to remove the adapter latch
116. Distortion Control For information on creating copies of existing photographs with reduced barrel and pin cushion distortion see page 358 Long Exposure NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction MENU button gt shooting menu If On is selected photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be processed to reduce noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog The time required for processing roughly doubles during processing uat nr will blink in the shutter speed aperture displays and pictures can not be taken if the camera is turned off before processing is complete the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be performed In continuous release mode frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Long exposure noise reduction is not available during movie recording High ISONR MENU button gt shooting menu Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise Option Description High Reduce noise randomly spaced bright pixels lines or fog Normal particularly in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities ________ Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High Low Normal and Low Noise reduction is performed only at sensitivities of 1600 and Off higher The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR
117. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed M 327 Computer displays NEF RAW images differently from camera Third party software does not display effects of Picture Controls Active D Lighting or vignette control Use ViewNX 2 supplied or optional Nikon software such as Capture NX 2 available separately Can not transfer photos to computer OS not compatible with camera or transfer software Use card reader to copy photos to computer M 242 HE Miscellaneous Date of recording is not correct Set camera clock M 27 Menu item can not be selected Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted Note that Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5b AC adapter 2 332 Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder control panel and monitor Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution m Lens aperture ringis Set ring to minimum FEE be blinks not set to minimum aperture largest 25 aperture f number lt a lt a Low battery Ready a fully charged 19 37 spare battery e Battery exhausted e Recharge or replace battery e Battery can notbe e Contact Nikon used authorized service representat
118. Exposure Mode To determine how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture when adjusting exposure press the MODE m button and rotate the main command dial until the desired option appears in the control panel MODE im button Main command dial Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring 1 373 lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode A aperture priority auto and M manual In other modes exposure mode A is automatically selected when a non CPU lens is attached 1 371 374 The exposure mode indicator F or will blink in the control panel and Awill be displayed in the viewfinder Depth of Field Preview To preview the effects of aperture press and hold the depth of field preview button The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera modes F and or the value chosen by the user modes A and M allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Depth of field preview button Custom Setting e4 Modeling Flash This setting controls whether the built in flash and optional flash units such as the SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 381 will emit a modeling flash when the depth of field preview button is pressed See page 307 for more information 117 fol 118 P Programmed Auto
119. F Choose size 25M gt 355 The options shown at right will be displayed highlight an option and press Resize Choose size 2 5m 1920x1280 2 5 M j j 1 1M 1280x 856 1 1M 0 6m 960x 640 0 6 M 03m 640x 424 0 3 M 356 Choose pictures Highlight Select image and press gt Highlight pictures and press the center of the multi selector to select or deselect to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button to view pictures in other locations as described on page 221 press 9H Selected pictures are marked by a Fm icon Press when the selection is complete Note that photographs taken at an image area setting of 5 4 80 can not be resized Resize Select image j Choose destination ym Choose size Resize Select i image 10010800 x Kel 2 pa 3 Ea E fie OSet Zoom MOK Save the resized copies A confirmation dialog will be displayed Highlight Yes and press to save the resized copies button Create resized copy 1 image Viewing Resized Copies Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed Image Quality Copies created from NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG or TIFF RGB photos have an image quality 1 84 of JPEG fine copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original Quick Retouch MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create copies with enhanced saturation and Qui
120. F RAW Lossless _ 324MB 133 21 compressed 12 bit NEF RAW Lossless _ compressed 14 bit FMB 193 w NEF RAW z Compressed 12 bit 22 0 MB 182 29 NEF RAW Compressed 14 bit 22 7 MB 131 20 NEF RAW Uncompressed 57 0 MB 133 18 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed z 74 4 MB 103 16 14 bit L 108 2 MB 71 16 TIFF RGB M 61 5 MB 126 18 S 28 0 MB 277 26 L 16 3 MB 360 56 JPEG fine M 10 4 MB 616 100 S 5 2 MB 1200 100 L 9 1 MB 718 100 JPEG normal M 5 3 MB 1200 100 S 2 6 MB 2400 100 L 4 0 MB 1400 100 JPEG basic M 2 7 MB 2400 100 S 1 4 MB 4800 100 Includes images taken with non DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop BE DX 24x 16 Image Area Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity 2 NEF RAW Lossless E compressed 12 bit 172MB ay ae NEF RAW Lossless _ compressed 14 bit 19MB a9 23 NEF RAW Compressed 12 bit 132MB 4 NEF RAW _ Compressed 14 bit 16 2 MB ai pi NEF RAW Uncompressed 25 0 MB 303 30 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed g 32 5 MB 236 25 14 bit L 46 6 MB 165 21 TIFF RGB M 26 8 MB 289 26 S 12 5 MB 616 41 L 8 0 MB 796 100 JPEG fine M 5 1 MB 1200 100 S 2 7 MB 2300 100 L 4 1 MB 1500 100 JPEG normal M 2 6 MB 2500 100 S 1 4 MB 4600 100 L 2 0 MB 3000 100 JPEG basic M 1 3 MB 5000 100 S 0 7 MB 8900 100 Includes images taken with DX lenses when On
121. Mode The following settings can be adjusted in movie live view Aperture Shutter speed ISO sensitivity Exposure compensation P45 Y A Y Vv M Y Y Y In exposure mode M ISO sensitivity can be set to values between 100 and Hi 2 0 and shutter speed to values between 1 25 s and 1 8 000 s the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame rate 0 70 In other exposure modes shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are adjusted automatically If the subject is over or under exposed in mode F or amp end live view and start movie live view again or select exposure A and adjust aperture 6 start recording Press the movie record button to start recording A recording indicator and the time available are displayed in the monitor Exposure is set using matrix metering and can be locked by pressing the t AE L AF L button CQ 128 or altered by up to 3 EV using exposure Com compensation M 130 In autofocus j mode the camera can be refocused by pressing the AF ON button Movie record button P15 56 200 Gh Time remaining Recording indicator Audio The camera can record both video and sound do not cover the microphone on the front of the camera during movie recording Note that the built in microphone may record sounds made by the lens during autofocus vibration reduction or changes to aperture See Also Frame size microphone s
122. Nikon Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera This manual is for both D800 and D800E digital cameras save where otherwise noted operations are identical Illustrations show the D800 To get the most from your camera please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read by all those who use the product Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used V This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This icon marks notes information that should be read before i using the camera QA This icon marks references to other pages in this manual Menu items options and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in bold Camera Settings The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used Help Use the camera s on board help feature for help on menu items and other topics See page 18 for details Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html A For Your Safety Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety xiii xv Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from Q The Table of ContentS sesseseseseseosesose
123. Overview 28 W E a1 0 One P 1 8000 F2 8 ESHi0 3 85mm 27 PLO TO crs sRGB ESD N m i 100ND8007DSC_0001 JPG Haan 10 06 22 12 11 109 8 7 JE Frame number total number of frames IJ Shutter speed JEJ Protect status scene 233 Aperture E Camera name pJ 50 sensitivity 2 seamen 109 4 Retouch indicator ccesssssssssssssssssssesseessee 341 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image 226 E Focal length EJ GPS data indicator E image comment indicator JJ mage quality esses 84 E Active D Lighting MAJE S ZE eseesensesecsesecesnseteneetenteeneeeneeee E Picture Control EJ mage area E Color space EJ File name BJ Flash mode g Time of recording White balance EH Folder name Color temperature 12 Date of recording White balance fine tuning E Current card slot Preset manual 74 Metering method PJA Flash compensation Commander mode as 15 Exposure mode i EJ Exposure compensation 130 1 Non FX formats including DX based movie format displayed in yellow 67 79 2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the amp button to zoom in on the image displayed in full frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect
124. SW Lock mirror up for cleaning R A mi limage Dust Off ref photo Current settings are shown by icons __ Flicker reduction B Time zone and date rMenu options Options in current menu If icon is displayed help for current item can be viewed by pressing Om amp 3 button CO 18 15 Using Camera Menus Menu Controls The multi selector and button are used to navigate the menus Multi selector Select Move cursor up highlighted item Select Cancel and return qs lt gt m highlighted to previous menu item or display ij sub menu button Move cursor down Select highlighted item Navigating the Menus Follow the steps below to navigate the menus 1 Display the menus X play T Press the MENU button to display the io menus MENU button 2 Highlight the icon for the SETUP MENU current menu Monitor brs Press lt to highlight the icon for the current menu 16 3 Select amenu Press A or to select the desired menu 4 Position the cursor in the PLAYBACK MENU Delet selected menu O Payback tolder Hide image Press gt to position the cursor peia maven in the selected menu Naite P Rotate tall 5 Highlight a menu item m PLAYBACK MENU D Delete Press A or W to highlight a mea 7 Playback displ ti menu item Pe Image review After delete P Rotate tall 6 Display optio
125. Select HDR high a _ SHOOTING MENU dynamic range me y g 4 Auto distortion control Li NR Press the MENU button to E High SO NR gt E ISO sensitivity settings display the menus Multiple exposure Highlight HDR high Interval timer shooting dynamic range in the MENU button shooting menu and press b gt 2 Select a mode HDR high dynamic range Highlight HDR mode and OFF gt R mode Exposure differential AUTO press gt Smoothing NORM Highlight one of the following and press HDR high dynamic range a HDR mode To take a series of HDR photographs select N On SS series HDR shooting will continue until you button select Off for HDR mode To take one HDR photograph select On single photo Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have created a single HDR photograph To exit without creating additional HDR photographs select Off If On series or On single photo is selected a Ml icon will be displayed in the control panel 177 178 3 Choose the exposure differential To choose the difference in exposure between the two shots highlight Exposure differential and press gt The options shown at right will be displayed Highlight an option and press amp Choose higher values for high contrast subjects but note that HDR high dynamic range HDR mode OND Exposure differential AUTO
126. Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome Portrait Landscape selected Picture Control can be modified storage for custom Picture Controls Media SD Secure Digital and UHS I compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards Type CompactFlash memory cards UDMA compliant Dual card slots Either card can be used for primary or backup storage or for separate storage of NEF RAW and JPEG images pictures can be copied between cards File system DCF Design Rule for Camera File System 2 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras 2 3 PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage FX 36x24 Approx 100 horizontal and 100 vertical e 1 2x 30x20 Approx 97 horizontal and 97 vertical DX 24x16 Approx 97 horizontal and 97 vertical 5 4 30x24 Approx 97 horizontal and 100 vertical Magnification Approx 0 7 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 17 mm 1 0 m from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens Diopter adjustment 3 1 m Focusing screen Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen with AF area brackets and framing grid Reflex mirror Quick return Viewfinder Depth of field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed lens aperture is stopped down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera F and amp
127. TTL i TTL flash control using RGB sensor with approximately 91K 91 000 pixels is available with built in flash and SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB 400 i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR is used with matrix and center weighted metering standard i TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering Flash mode Front curtain sync slow sync rear curtain sync red eye reduction red eye reduction with slow sync slow rear curtain sync Auto FP High Speed Sync supported Flash compensation 3 1 EV in increments of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV Flash ready indicator Lights when built in flash or optional flash unit is fully charged blinks for 3 s after flash is fired at full output Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built in System CLS flash SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 or SB 700 as a master flash and SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes or SU 800 as commander built in flash can serve as master flash in commander mode Auto FP High Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units Sync terminal ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread White balance White balance Auto 2 types incandescent fluorescent 7 types direct sunlight flash c
128. Table of Contents QRA INE rioan naana ii For YOUP Sey asana xiii leiate e E E A E E E xvi Quick Start GUIAC ecsesessessssessecssscssessssecssesssecsscssecsecessecsecsssessseeses xxi Introduction 1 Package CONtents sssescccssesccsssecssseeecsssssesssesecsssecesssecessseeessssesesseeees 1 Getting to Know the CaMera seseccssesscsssesccssesccseeeccssseeesssesessseesensees 2 Camera Body 2 The Control Panel 6 The Viewfinder Display ssscsssssscssssccssseccsssescsseesssnseessseeeseneesee 8 The Information Display sssccssssscsssecssssssccseesssssecssneesssntecssaees 10 The BM 12 Monitor COVEN esssscssssssssessssssssessssecssscsssessssessseessees 14 Tutorial 15 Camera MOMUS secssisssssssaascuscicsdecsessnsscocsaccasssscscensnceacesstsensseasbaccesscsorseeres 15 Using Camera Menus ssssssssscsssscssssssecsssscsseecsssecnseesseecsseeenseesees 16 Helpis en NR 18 First Steps ssssssessssssssssersessssese 19 Charge the Battery ssssssssssssssccsecssssseccssecesssseccsueesssneeessaseesees 19 Insert the Battery sssnmntccigancaaniGungninnancankiGus 21 Attach a LEMS ascccsissecocovssseassoissacoconssssntisnnosenennnusensconasesoncensiasseenoubessee 24 Basic SOCUP sissssessscccsenasssssessceccsnsescossvasssosseasadccbsensnssgeassdesipoascconsnedieciies 26 Insert a Memory Card sssscsssessccsseccsssccssecessssescsseeessueecssneeessneeees 29 Format the Memory Card ssssccc
129. Tracking In AF C mode the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF ON button is pressed This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous servo AF see Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection N 281 For information on using release priority in single servo AF see Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection 282 For information on preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter release button is pressed halfway see Custom Setting a4 AF activation M 283 See page 48 for information on the autofocus options available in live view or during movie recording AF Area Mode Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected Single point AF Select the focus point as described on page 96 the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only Use with stationary subjects Dynamic area AF Select the focus point as described on page 96 In AF C focus mode the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves the selected point The number of focus points varies with the mode selected 9 point dynamic area AF Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or when
130. X 2 includes a Nikon Transfer 2 function for copying pictures from the camera to the computer where ViewNX 2 can be used to view and print selected images or to edit photographs and movies Before installing ViewNX 2 confirm that your computer meets the system requirements on page 242 239 240 1 Startthe computer and insert the ViewNX 2 installer CD Windows Mac 0S Waati 2 Double click icon on desktop 4 Nikon Welcome Double click Welcome icon 4 2 Selecta language If the desired language is not Select region if required available click Region Selection to choose a different region and then choose the desired language region selection is not vailable in the European o B Select Click Next language Start the installer Click Install and follow the on Click Install screen instructions M Installation Guide For help installing ViewNxX 2 click Installation Guide in Step 3 4 Exit the installer Click Yes Windows or OK Mac OS when installation is complete Windows Click Yes Click OK The following software is installed e ViewNX 2 Apple QuickTime Windows only 5 Remove the installer CD from the CD ROM drive vV Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Close the connector cover when
131. ady exists a D or El icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number e D Folder is empty B Folder is partially full E Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 No further pictures can be stored in this folder 3 Save changes and exit Press to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the storage folder press the MENU button If a folder with the specified number does not already exist a new folder will be created on the card in the primary slot Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full 271 272 HE Select Folder from List 1 Choose Select folder from Storage folder Select folder from list list ey 100N800 101ND800 Highlight Select folder from ioana list and press gt 2 Highlight a folder Press A or W to highlight a folder 3 Select the highlighted folder Press to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures ora picture numbered 9999 the shutter release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken To continue shooting create a folder with a number less than 999 or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images Startup Time Additional time may
132. ailable when a memory card is inserted in the camera and that the Load settings option is only available if the card contains saved settings Saved Settings Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP8 The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed 336 Virtual Horizon MENU button gt setup menu Display roll and pitch information based on information from the camera tilt sensor If the camera is tilted neither left nor right the roll reference line will turn green while if the camera is tilted neither forward nor back the pitch reference line will turn green and a dot will appear in the center of the display Each division is equivalent to 5 Camera tilted leftor Camera tilted forward right or back Camera level m Tilting the Camera The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back If the camera is unable to measure tilt the amount of tilt will not be displayed See Also For information on viewing a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder see Custom Setting f4 Assign Fn button gt Fn button press A 311 313 For information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view see pages 54 and 66 337 AF Fine Tune MENU button gt setup menu Fine tune focus for up to 20 lens types AF tuning is not recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal focus use only when required
133. ait until F a r stops blinking about six seconds or press any button other than the MODE Am and i 2 buttons T rm button MODE sm button 32 3 Press the MODE and F buttons again Press the MODE mm and t rm buttons together a second time while F a r is blinking to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the control panel and viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings 33 34 vV Memory Cards Memory cards may be hot after use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards Do not remove memory cards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied to a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card Do not expose to water high levels of humidity or direct sunlight Do not format memory cards in a computer The Write Protect Switch SD memory cards are equipped with a write prote
134. ally select Manual sensitivity then highlight an option and press 8 Destination Choose the slot to which movies Movie settings are recorded The menu shows the time available on each card recording ends a Destination L SD cardsiot C automatically when no time remains Note a Ra that regardless of the option selected 00h 00m 04s photographs are recorded to the card in the primary slot M 89 1 Select Movie settings Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Movie settings in the shooting menu and press P O MENU button SHOOTING MENU Time lapse photography OFF Movie settings z Choose movie options Highlight the desired item and press gt then highlight an option and press Movie settings Frame size frame rate EED Movie quality HIGH Microphone bA Destination OSD 71 Viewing Movies Movies are indicated by a icon in full frame playback 1 219 Press the center of the multi selector to start playback WRicon Length Current position total length LG EN 01n305 10305 N A Movie progress Volume Guide bar a The following operations can be performed To Use Description Pause Pause playback Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind advance Speed increases with an GD each press from 2x to 4x to 8x to 16x keep pressed to skip to beginning or end of movie first frame is indicat
135. anging the brightness of the main subject relative to the background Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections If flash compensation is combined with exposure compensation M 130 the exposure values will be added together To choose a value for flash compensation press the 4 EA button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel g 5 EA button Sub command dial GD EET d E 0 EV 1 0 EV 4 button pressed At values other than 0 0 a icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the A button The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by pressing the E button Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to 0 0 Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off Optional Flash Units The SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 also allow flash compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit the value selected with the flash unit is added to the value selected with the camera See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for flash compensation see Custom Setting b3 Exp flash comp step value 2 287 For information on automatically varying flash level over a series of shots see page 132 189 190 FV Lock Thi
136. aperture not locked at highest f number If FE E is displayed in the control panel select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f9 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture Q 317 Exposure mode selected with tui amp selected for shutter speed 418 Camera is slow to respond to shutter release button Select Off for Custom Setting d4 Exposure delay mode M 293 Only one shot taken each time shutter release button is pressed in continuous release mode e Lower the built in flash A 107 Turn HDR off 176 Photos are out of focus e Rotate focus mode selector to AF 1 91 e Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus or focus lock ZO 98 101 Full range of shutter speeds not available Flash in use Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed when using compatible flash units choose 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for full range of shutter speeds M 299 Focus does not lock when shutter release button is pressed halfway Camera is in focus mode AF C use t AE L AF L button to lock focus 2 98 Can not select focus point Unlock focus selector lock V 96 e Auto area AF or face priority AF selected for AF area mode choose another mode 49 93 e Camera is in playback mode M 219 Menus are in use M 259 e Press shutter release button halfway to activate exposure meters M 42 Image size ca
137. appended to the overlay when it is saved copyright information however is not copied Overlays saved in NEF RAW format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF RAW recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original images JPEG overlays are saved using size priority compression NEF RAW Processing MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs 1 Select NEF RAW NEF RAW processing processing toonen Highlight NEF RAW S EEA pa processing and press gt to 9 O gt a p display a picture selection x ate dialog listing only NEF RAW images created with this camera 2 Selecta photograph NEF RAW processing E 100ND800 Highlight a photograph to eae view the highlighted photograph full frame press Es p and hold the amp button to view Eom OK images in other locations as described on page 221 press 9 Press to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step 353 3 Adjust NEF RAW processing settings Adjust the settings listed below Note that white balance and vignette control are not available with multiple exposures or pictures created with image overlay and that exposure compensation can only be set to values between 2 and 2 EV If Auto is selected for white balance it will be set to whichever of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors was in effect when the picture was taken The Picture Control grid is
138. apter unplug the adapter to prevent fire If the product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant Do not however store the camera case ina plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals To prevent mold or mildew take the camera out of storage at least once a month Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Notes on the monitor The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision at least 99 99 of pixels are effective with no more than 0 01 being missing or defective Hence while these displays may contain pixels that are always lit white red blue or green or always off black this is not a malfunction and has no effect
139. art point and or end point press A All frames before the selected start point and after the selected end point will be removed from the copy 75 6 Save the copy Highlight one of the following and press e Save as new file Save the copy to a new file SS Overwrite existing file Cancel Preview Overwrite existing file Replace the original movie file with the edited copy e Cancel Return to Step 5 Preview Preview the copy Edited copies are indicated by a Micon in full frame playback m Trimming Movies The Retouch Menu Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie option in the retouch menu 2 341 Movies must be at least two seconds long If a copy can not be created at the current playback position the current position will be displayed in red in Step 5 and no copy will be created The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory card Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original RETOUCH MENU Miniature effect ba Selective color a Edit movie wt Ea o 4 iA E 76 Saving Selected Frames To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still 1 View the movie and steed ee choose a frame Play the movie back as described on page 72 your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar Pause the movie at the frame you intend to copy 2 Display
140. attery Type MENU button gt Custom Settings menu To ensure that the camera functions as expected when the optional MB D12 battery pack is used with AA batteries match the option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack There is no need to adjust this option when using EN EL15 or optional EN EL18 batteries Option Description BLR6 LR6 AA alkaline Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries BNW HR6 AA Ni MH Select when using HR6 Ni MH AA batteries BFR6 FR6 AA lithium Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries Using AA Batteries The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 C 68 F and varies with make and storage conditions in some cases batteries may cease to function before their expiry date Some AA batteries can not be used due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity alkaline batteries have less capacity than some other types and should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer temperatures The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows Control panel Viewfinder Description TZ Batteries fully charged z cA Low battery Ready fresh batteries a CA A blinks blinks Shutter release disabled Change batteries 297 d12 Battery Order MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the battery inthe camera or Ra
141. be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of files or folders File Naming MENU button gt shooting menu Photographs are saved using file names consisting of DSC_ or in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space M 274 DSC followed by a four digit number and a three letter extension e g DSC_0001 JPG The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the DSC portion of the file name For information on editing file names see page 170 Extensions The following extensions are used NEF for NEF RAW images TIF for TIFF RGB images JPG for JPEG images MOV for movies and NDF for dust off reference data In each pair of photographs recorded at image quality settings of NEF RAW JPEG the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names but different extensions 273 274 Color Space MENU button gt shooting menu The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose sRGB for photographs that will be printed or used as is with no further modification Adobe RGB has a wider color gamut and is recommended for images that will be extensively processed or retouched after leaving the camera Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is wid
142. button is pressed tH AE lock only Exposure locks while the MB D12 AF 0N button is pressed Exposure locks when the MB D12 AF 0N button is AE lock Reset pressed and remains locked until the button is me f onrelease pressed a second time the shutter is released or the exposure meters turn off mD AE lock Hold Exposure locks when the MB D12 AF 0N button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off ma AFlockonly Focus locks while the MB D12 AF ON button is pressed SameasFn The MB D12 AF 0N button performs the function button selected for Custom Setting f4 V 311 g1 Assign Fn Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the Fn button during movie live view Option Description Aperture widens while the button is pressed Use in Power aperture combination with Custom Setting g2 Assign open preview button gt Power aperture close for button controlled aperture adjustment Index marking Press the button during movie recording to add an index at the current position M 63 Indices can be used when viewing and editing movies View photo shooting info Press the button to display information on shutter speed aperture and other photo settings in place of movie recording information Press again to return to the movie recording display None Pressing the button has no effec
143. calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft 35mm zoom head position its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 approximately 23 ft 7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 The following features are available with CLS compatible flash units Flash unit Advanced Wireless Lighting Master commander Remote SB 910 SB 910 SB 910 SB 900 SB 900 SB 900 SB 700 Flash mode feature SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 SB 800 SB 700 SU 800 SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 i TTL balanced fill i TTL flashfordigital V7 3 V W HW i vY vivje SLR AA Autoapertre Yt WwW wW w A Non TILauto t W wv GN Distance priority zA aah seer cee les ces feces Ye manual M Manual Y vV V VS e U Y Y vje RPT Repeatingflah Y lv v v Auto FP High Speed Sync Y Y Y eUi Uii evi evige FV lock Y VY vV v v vj v v vj AF assist j inulti aree vivivl lvlvlvJ J Je Flash Color Information Communication BE CM GEN OREN a ne REAR Rear curtainsync YW WY WY W W vey Uey Red eyereduction Y YV VW v v v Power zoom Yiv jvj
144. cators in the viewfinder Press the button a second time to return to clear the indicators from display Roll Camera tilted right Camera level Camera tilted left KEELCEETTLII I nmnnmenmay Pitch Camera tilted forward Camera level Camera tilted back o 0 nnnunmane gt PO Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back 313 HE Fn button command dials Selecting Fn button command dials displays the following options Option Description Press the Fn button and 4Assign Fn button rotate a command dial to Choasa imaga araa choose from pre selected ig J v FX 36x24 1 0x Chodia image image areas M 79 m 1 2x 30x20 1 2x Ja 9 Selecting Choose image area area displays a list of image areas highlight options and press the multi selector right to select or deselect then highlight Done and press Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to lock shutter speed in modes and M press Shutter speed the Fn button and rotate the sub command dial to amp aperture lock lock aperture in modes A and M See page 126 for more information If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated changes to shutter speed exposure sh 1 step spd modes and M and aperture exposure modes fA i aperture and M are made in increments of 1 EV regard
145. ccess lamp will light briefly CompactFlash memory cards Insert the card into the CompactFlash card slot with the front label toward the monitor When the memory card is fully inserted the eject button will pop up and the green access lamp will light briefly Eject button vV Inserting Memory Cards Insert the memory card terminals first Inserting the card upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the card Check to be sure that the card is in the correct orientation SD memory card Direction of insertion for lefts amp E card slot ji Front label CompactFlash card Direction of m G P insertion for right Com Q pactFlash card slot Aes Front label Close the card slot cover If this is the first time the memory card will be used after being used or formatted in another device format the card as described on page 32 m Memory Card Icons The memory cards currently inserted in the camera are indicated as shown the example at right shows the icons displayed when both an SD and a CompactFlash card are inserted If the memory card is full or an error has occurred the icon for the affected card will blink 4 419 Using Two Memory Cards See page 89 for information on choosing the roles played by each card when two cards are inserted in the camera MMA somn ROT sRGB 0O GA ORG BKT a amp oS Informa
146. ced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography BE CLS Compatible Flash Units The camera can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units The SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 Flash unit Feature SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 2 SB R200 3 Guide ISO 100 34 111 34 111 38 125 28 92 30 98 21 69 10 33 No 4 180200 48 157 48 157 53 174 39 128 42 138 30 98 14 46 1 Ifa color filter is attached to the SB 910 SB 900 or SB 700 when AUTO or amp flash is selected for white balance the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately 2 Wireless flash control is not available with the SB 400 3 Controlled remotely with built in flash in commander mode or using optional SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 or SB 700 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 4 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 at 35 mm zoom head position SB 910 SB 900 and SB 700 with standard illumination SU 800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units in up to three groups The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash Guide Number To
147. ces the camera may also become noticeably warm but this does not indicate a malfunction The ambient temperature is high The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods If live view does not start when you press the button wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again 69 70 Movie Settings Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu to adjust the following settings Frame size frame rate Movie quality Choose from the following options Maximum bit rate Mbps Option high quality Normal Maximum length ism 1920 x 1080 30 fps 2 24 12 im 1920 x 1080 25 fps 24 12 im 1920 x 1080 24 fps 2 24 12 20m 1280 x 720 60 fps 24 12 29 min 59s 20mm 1280 x 720 50 fps 24 12 20m 1280x 720 30 fps 12 8 20m 1280x 720 25 fps 12 8 1 Actual frame rate is 29 97 fps for values listed as 30 fps 23 976 fps for values listed as 24 fps and 59 94 fps for values listed as 60 fps 2 Maximum length for High quality movies is 20 minutes Microphone Turn the built in or optional ME 1 Movie settings fal Manual sensitivity stereo microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity automatically Microphone off to turn sound recording off to select microphone sensitivity manu
148. ck in 35 36 Adjusting Viewfinder Focus If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above select single servo autofocus AF S Q 91 single point AF M 93 and the center focus point M 96 and then frame a high contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter release button halfway to focus the camera With the camera in focus use the diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder If necessary viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional corrective lenses I 388 Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses Corrective lenses available separately D388 can be used to further adjust viewfinder diopter Before attaching a diopter adjustment viewfinder lens remove the DK 17 viewfinder eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to release the eyepiece lock and then unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right Basic Photography and Playback Turn the Camera On Before taking photographs turn the camera on and check the battery level and number of exposures remaining as described below 1 Turn the camera on Turn the camera on The control panel will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light Power switch 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the control panel or viewfinder Icon Control panel Viewfinder Descript
149. ck retouch contrast D Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit subjects Press A or W to choose the amount of enhancement The effect can be previewed in Cancel Zoom Save the edit display Press to copy the photograph Straig hten MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create a straightened copy of the selected image Press gt to rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments of approximately 0 25 degrees d to rotate it counterclockwise the effect can be previewed in the edit display note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy Press to copy the photograph or press P to exit to playback without creating a copy 357 358 Distortion Control MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion Select Auto to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector or select Manual to reduce distortion manually note that Auto is not available with photos taken using auto distortion control see page 276 Press to reduce barrel distortion lt q to reduce pincushion distortion the effect can be previewed in the edit display note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out Press to copy the photograph or press to exit to playback without creating a copy Note that distortion control may heavily crop or distort t
150. cked at detected value with ft AE L AF L button ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index ISO 100 6400 in steps of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 50 equivalent below ISO 100 or to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 or 2 EV ISO 25600 equivalent above ISO 6400 auto ISO sensitivity control available Active D Lighting Can be selected from Auto Extra high High Normal Low or Off Focus Autofocus Nikon Advanced Multi CAM 3500FX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase detection fine tuning 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors f 8 supported by 11 sensors and AF assist illuminator range approx 0 5 3 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in Detection range 2 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F Lens servo Autofocus AF Single servo AF AF S continuous servo AF AF C predictive focus tracking automatically activated according to subject status Manual focus M Electronic rangefinder can be used Focus point Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points AF area mode Single point AF 9 21 or 51 point dynamic area AF 3D tracking auto area AF Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter release button halfway single servo AF or by pressing Art AE L AF L button Flash Built in flash Manual pop up with button release and a Guide Number of 12 39 12 39 with manual flash m ft ISO 100 20 C 68 F Flash control
151. cntrl for built in flash Q 301 The information display shows the flash control mode for the built in flash as follows Flash sync Auto FP A 299 300 i TTL Manual M Repeating flash RPT Commander mode CMD CMD FP 185 186 1 The Built in Flash Use with lenses with focal lengths of 24 300 mm in FX format M 375 Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses i TTL flash control is available at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400 at other sensitivities the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture values If the flash fires in continuous release mode M 103 only one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots The flash can be used again after a short pause See Also See page 190 for information on locking flash value FV for a metered subject before recomposing a photograph For information on auto FP high speed sync and choosing a flash sync speed see Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 299 For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed M 300 For information on flash control and using
152. converter is used separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter Eye Fi Upload MENU button gt setup menu This option is displayed only when an Eye Fi memory card available separately from third party suppliers is inserted in the camera Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected destination Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where wireless devices are prohibited When an Eye Fi card is inserted its status is indicated by an icon in the information display Eye Fi upload disabled Eye Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for upload static Eye Fi upload enabled waiting to begin upload animated Eye Fi upload enabled uploading data amp Error camera can not control Eye Fi card If a blinking Ara appears in the control panel or viewfinder refer to page 420 if this indicator is not blinking pictures can be taken normally but you may be unable to change Eye Fi settings GMA OMFG BTS amp 339 340 m Eye Fi Cards Eye Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected If a warning is displayed in the monitor A 420 turn the camera off and remove the card See the manual provided with the Eye Fi card and direct any inquiries to the manufacturer The camera can be used to turn Eye F
153. copying choose Deselect all before proceeding 6 Select additional images 5 Deselect all Highlight pictures and press a the center of the multi selector 0 1 Booz B o0 3 to select or deselect to view EFE r the highlighted picture full DSet EZoom MOK screen press and hold the amp button Selected images are marked with a v Press to proceed to Step 7 when your selection is complete 7 Choose Select destination pE COP imase folder Select source OSD Highlight Select destination tension taiat gt Copy image s folder and press gt 263 264 8 Select a destination folder To enter a folder number choose Select folder by number enter the number 271 and press To choose from a list of existing folders choose Select folder from list highlight a folder and press g oPY image s Select folder by number 11012 100 999 Move Set MOK g _C0PY image s Select folder from list 100ND800 102ND800 103ND800 9 Copy the images Highlight Copy image s and press button A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press Press again to exit when copying is complete a Copy image s Select source DSD Select image s 100 Select destination folder 101 Copy 3 images m Copying Images Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination card Be sure the battery
154. corececeereereeeeeee 283 a5 AF point Illumination ssssssssssssssessssssssreessssseresssssereesssssneess 284 a6 Focus Point Wrap Around sessssssseccssescccsseessnetecesseees 284 a7 Number of Focus Points ssssssssssssssseesssssereessssereesssseneesse 285 a8 Built in AF assist Illuminator 286 b Metering ExPOsure sssesessee 287 b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value 287 b2 EV Steps for Exposure Ctl ssssssssssssssssssssessssssseeesessssee 287 b3 Exp Flash Comp Step Value eecsssssccssssccsseeecsseeeenee 287 b4 Easy Exposure Compensation ssesccsseccesetscesseeeenees 288 b5 Center Weighted Area ccsssscssssscsssessecsecssseeecesseesesees b6 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure Me GETHMERS AE LOCK iieri intressin c1 Shutter Release Button AE L c2 Auto Meter off Delay essssscssssesccsseccsssecsseecssseecenseees C32 Self TIME henan nnan c4 Monitor off Delay ssssssssssssssresssssereesssssrreesssseneenssseneesss SHOOtING Display sseeessssssseseccessssecessssnsessecssseceesssseeesecsssees 292 dI BEED hii rnea E E E n 292 d2 CL Mode Shooting Speed ss sssssssssssssssressssssreessssessesse 293 d3 Max Continuous Release 293 d4 Exposure Delay Mode 293 d5 File Number Sequence 294 d6 Viewfinder Grid Display ssscsssssccssescesseeccsseesssneeees 295 d7 ISO Display and AdjUStMent sesscssescccssecesseseeenseees 295 C8 S
155. created custom Picture Controls The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera M 163 can not be copied to the memory card renamed or deleted 173 174 Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows Active D Lighting Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day It is most effective when used with matrix metering M 115 Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting amp A Auto M Active D Lighting versus D Lighting The Active D Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting To use Active D Lighting 1 Select Active D Lighting in the shooting menu To display the menus press the MENU button Highlight Active D Lighting in the shooting menu and press gt MENU button 5 SHOOTING MENU Image area 77 JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Color space El Active D Lighting Choose an option Highlight the desired option and press If amp A Auto is selected the Active D Lighting a EA Auto t H Extra h
156. creen Tip Sicinius 295 d9 Information Display ssssscssssccssseccsseesccnsecssseeeeenseees 296 d10 LCD IIlumination 296 d11 MB D12 Battery Type 297 d12 Battery Order 298 e Bracketing Flash essscssessssscsssessscesseessecesneseceressesseneeneeeseeese 299 e1 Flash Sync SP ed w seesssssssccsssssccsseeecssteccsseceenecssneeesenseees 299 e2 Flash Shutter Speed cescssesssssecsesecsecsssesssscssscssseecseeeess 300 e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash on eesssssseseccccssseeseesssees 301 e4 Modeling Flash e5 Auto Bracketing Set cssecssssssccseccsseeeccssececsneecesneeessneees 307 e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M sssssscssseccssessecsseesesntecssneees 308 e7 Bracketing Order eescsssecsssesscsssecessssccsseceesseecssseeeeenseees 308 f COntrOlS irasi eninin nia 309 f1 8 SWitCh sssssssssssssesresssssserrssssssre 309 f2 Multi Selector Center Button 309 f3 Multi Selector seeesscsesseeesees 310 f4 Assign Fn Button eeessssesccsssccesssccesnsececsseccssseccessecsenuecsse 311 f5 Assign Preview Button escssssecsssesecssecssseseccssecseseteeeee 315 f6 Assign AE L AF L button s ssssssssssessesssssssessssressseeessseesssee 315 f7 Shutter Spd amp Aperture LOCK s ssssssssssssssersssssseressssssee 316 f8 Assign BKT Button 316 f9 Customize Command Dials f10 Release Button to Use Dial x f11 Slot Empty Release LOCK
157. ct in photographs 402 Cleaning When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunction and the display will soon return to normal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter A 394 for information on cleaning the low pass filter Lens contacts Keep the lens contacts clean Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored but this has no affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area If you are using an AC ad
158. ct switch to prevent Z accidental loss of data When this switch O is in the lock position the memory Write protect switch card can not be formatted and photos can not be deleted or recorded a warning will be displayed in the monitor if you attempt to release the shutter To unlock the memory card slide the switch to the write position No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted the control panel and viewfinder will show E If the camera is turned off with a charged EN EL15 battery and no memory card inserted E will be displayed in the control panel See Also See page 326 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card option in the setup menu Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before shooting 1 Turn the camera on Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on 2 Lift the diopter adjustment control 3 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter adjustment control s until the viewfinder display focus L points and AF area brackets are in sharp N AIDA focus When operating the control with your eye to the viewfinder be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye 4 Replace the diopter adjustment control Push the diopter adjustment control ba
159. ctor RESET Select center Pressing the center of the multi selector in live view focus point selects the center focus point Q Zoom on off Press the center of the multi selector to toggle zoom on and off Choose the initial zoom setting from Low magnification Medium magnification and High magnification The zoom display will center on the active focus point Not used Pressing the center of the multi selector has no effect in live view f3 Multi Selector MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Reset meter off delay is selected operating the multi selector when the exposure meters are off M 42 will activate the exposure meters If Do nothing is selected the exposure meters will not be 3 Multi selector Reset meter off delay Do nothing C activated when the multi selector is pressed 310 f4 Assign Fn Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the Fn button either by itself Fn button press or when used in combination with the command dials Fn button command dials HO EE Fn button press Selecting Fn button press displays the following options Option Description Preview Press the Fn button to preview depth of field Q 117 Press the Fn button to lock flash value built in flash and FV lock compatible optional flash units only 0A 190 382 Press again to cancel FV lock Ha AE AFlock
160. d dial Non CPU Lenses M 371 374 Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non CPU lens data item in setup menu M 213 when a non CPU lens is attached the current f number will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel rounded to the nearest full stop Otherwise Ps eso the aperture displays will show only the number of stops AF with maximum aperture displayed as AF and the f number must be read from the lens aperture ring 121 M Manual In manual exposure mode you control both shutter speed and aperture While the exposure meters are on rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to set aperture Shutter speed can be set to x 250 or to values between 30 s and s 000 s or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure ish amp 124 Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens Use the exposure indicators to check exposure Sub command dial Aperture Shutter speed fel Main command dial Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected setting M 126 122 AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture Exposur
161. d readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB cards 2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC compliant The camera supports UHS 1 3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDXC compliant The XC XC I camera supports UHS 1 SP SP BE CompactFlash Memory Cards The following Type CompactFlash memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the camera Type Il cards and microdrives can not be used Extreme Pro SDCFXP 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB Extreme SDCFX 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB SADEK Extreme IV SDCFX4 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB Extreme III SDCFX3 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB Ultra II SDCFH 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB Standard SDCFB 2 GB 4 GB 600 x 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB Professional UDMA 400 x 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 300 x 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB Lexar 233 x 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB Media Professional 133 x 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 80x 2 GB 4 GB Platinum It 80x 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 60x 4GB Ez 436 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on an 8 GB Toshiba R95 W80MB s UHS I SDHC card at different image quality 84 image size M 87 and image area settings M 79 BE FX 36x24 Image Area Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity NE
162. d to Step 4 Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 251 252 3 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card to view images in other locations press 8 amp 3 and select the desired card and folder as described on page 221 To display the current picture full screen press and hold the amp button To select the current picture for printing press the Om button and press A The picture will be marked with a G icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 On amp button Q button Print selet amp 100ND800 a 100 1 100 2 100 3 erased m 100 5 100 6 er L GIOK Print select A DSC_0001 JPG 10 01 2012 10 03 34 Keeping the Om i button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options button Setup Start printing 0K Page size Border Time stamp 5 Adjust printing options Choose page size border and time stamp options as described on page 249 a warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small for an index print 6 start printing Select Start pr
163. display shots increment Bracketing order ME foeren TE 0 1 0 bar 3 1B 1B 0 2B AGF 3 TA TA 2A 0 ber 2 1B 0 1B Aer 2 1A O 1A JF 3 1A 1B 0 1A 1B GF 5 1A 1B 0 2A 1A 1B 2B 0 3A 2A 1A lt iF TAIB 1B 2B 3B 0 4 A 3 A 2 A 1 A 4 GF i 2 1A1B 1B 2B 3B 4B See Also See page 150 for a definition of mired 4 Framea photograph focus and shoot S Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will havea different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining F ut amp and the icon for the affected card will flash in the control panel a flashing Fut icon will appear in the viewfinder as shown at right and the shutter release will be disabled Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted 139 140 Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and is no longer displayed The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset M 193 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the nex
164. e Add starburst effects to light sources Cross screen Number of points Choose from four six Paci or eight Filter amount Choose the brightness of the light sources affected Filter angle Choose the angle of the Sancel Zoom OK points Length of points Choose the length of points Confirm Preview the effects of the filter as shown at right Press amp to preview the copy full frame Save Create a retouched copy Cross screen Add a soft filter effect Press A or V to Son choose the filter strength E L OKAT 348 Color Balance MENU button gt gi retouch menu adia aad Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms M 225 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Press to copy the photograph Cancel MSave Increase amount of green D Wy Increase amount of magenta Increase amount of blue P Increase amount of amber Zoom To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor press amp The histogram will be updated to show data only for the portion of the image displayed in the monitor While the image is zoomed in press O n E to toggle back and forth between color balance and zoom When E save zoom is selected you can zoom in and out with the amp and buttons and scroll the image with the multi selector 349 I
165. e computer the PC connection indicator F will appear in the control panel Printing Photographs Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer 1 433 connected directly to the camera vV Selecting Photographs for Printing Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW or TIFF RGB Q 84 can not be selected for printing JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu M 353 Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection set Color space to sRGB M 274 See Also See page 422 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 247 Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC E14 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle 1 USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the printer do not connect the cable via a USB hub 3 Turn the camera on A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display 248 Printing Pictures One at a Time 1 Selecta picture Press lt or P to view additional pictures Pr
166. e photography will end and no movie will be recorded if the power source is removed or disconnected or the destination memory card is ejected EE No Photograph The camera will skip the current frame if the camera is unable to focus in AF S note that the camera focuses again before each shot Shooting will resume with the next frame Image Review The E button can not be used to view pictures while time lapse photography is in progress but the current frame will be displayed for a few seconds after each shot if On is selected for Image review in the playback menu CQ 265 Other playback operations can not be performed while the frame is displayed See Also For information on setting a beep to sound when time lapse photography is complete see Custom Setting d1 Beep M 292 211 212 Non CPU Lenses By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using anon CPU lens If the focal length of the lens is known Power zoom can be used with optional flash units 1 382 e Lens focal length is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display If the maximum aperture of the lens is known The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder e Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture e Aperture is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and
167. e EN EL15 battery camera Approximately 2 400 shots One EN EL15 battery MB D12 Approximately 2 400 shots One EN EL18 battery MB D12 Approximately 3 800 shots Eight AA alkaline batteries MB D12 Approximately 2 400 shots 1 Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S NIKKOR 24 120mm f 4G ED VR lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s flash fired once every other shot Live view not used 2 Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED VR II lens under the following test conditions vibration reduction off image quality set to JPEG normal image size set to L large shutter speed 1 250 s shutter release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off 440 The following can reduce battery life e Using the monitor e Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway e Repeated autofocus operations e Taking NEF RAW or TIFF RGB photographs e Slow shutter speeds e Using an optional WT 4 wireless transmitter e Using the optional GP 1 GPS unit e Using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL15 batteries e Keep the batte
168. e Indicators The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and control panel show whether the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl Q 287 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the exposure indicators and the shutter speed modes FP and A and or aperture modes and 5 displays will flash Custom Setting b2 set to 1 3 step Optimal exposure Underexposed by 3 EV Overexposed by over 3 EV Control panel eS Ce lS ee ol CECE ee Viewfinder 0 0 0 See Also For information reversing the exposure indicators so that negative values are displayed on the right and positive values on the left see Custom Setting f12 Reverse indicators V 319 123 Long Time Exposures At a shutter speed of tis amp the shutter will remain open while the shutter release button is held down Use for long time exposure photographs of moving lights the stars night scenery or fireworks A tripod and optional remote cord M 390 are recommended to prevent blur Shutter speed 35 s aperture f 25 124 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it ona stable level surface If you are using an optional remote cord attach it to the camera Long T
169. e M button is pressed Picture Control indicator The Shooting Menu Picture Controls can also be selected using SHOOTING MENU the Set Picture Control option in the e pet shooting menu 1 268 NEF RAW recording White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting Modifying Existing Picture Controls Existing preset or custom Picture Controls 169 can be modified to suit the scene or Exf Quickadiust Sharpening the user s creative intent Choose a balanced Contrast 7 m h hti combination of settings using Quick adjust Saturation or make manual adjustments to individual JETES settings Grid Reset MOK T Select a Picture Control Set Picture Control a ESD Standard Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Picture Control a list N 163 and press ER Landscape Grid CAdiust 2 Adjust settings Vivid E Quick adjust Press A or W to highlight the Sharpening i Contrast on desired setting and press lt or Brightness 20 Saturation L gt to choose a value M 166 Repeat this step until all y Grid Reset EOK settings have been adjusted or select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the t rm button 3 Press 8 Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from Set Picture Control default settings are indicat
170. e and thumbnail 4 9 or 72 images playback with playback zoom movie playback photo and or movie slide shows highlights histogram display auto image rotation and image comment up to 36 characters Interface USB SuperSpeed USB USB 3 0 Micro B connector HDMI output Type C mini pin HDMI connector can be used simultaneously with camera monitor Audio input Stereo mini pin jack 3 5mm diameter Audio output Stereo mini pin jack 3 5mm diameter Ten pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control GP 1 GPS unit or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183 version 2 01 or 3 01 requires optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord and cable with D sub 9 pin connector Supported languages Supported languages Arabic Chinese Simplified and Traditional Czech Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Indonesian Italian Japanese Korean Norwegian Polish Portuguese Romanian Russian Spanish Swedish Thai Turkish Ukrainian Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL15 battery Battery pack Optional MB D12 multi power battery pack with one rechargeable Nikon EN EL18 Li ion battery available separately one rechargeable Nikon EN EL15 Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline Ni MH or lithium batteries A BL 5 battery chamber cover is required when using EN EL18 batteries AC adapter EH 5b AC adapter requires EP 5B power connector available separately Tripod socket Tripod
171. e balance and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot or to experiment with different settings for the same subject EE Exposure and Flash Bracketing To vary exposure and or flash level over a series of photographs Ae W d ie AN Exposure modified by Exposure modified by Exposure modified by OEV 1 EV 1 EV 132 1 Select flash or exposure Bracketing flash Flash cntrl for builtin flash TTL r l bracketing for Custom gt 24 Modeling flash ON P O igl 5 Auto bracketing set AES Setting e5 Auto Auto bracketing Mode M Bracketing order N bracketing set in the sith l f2 Multi selector center button Custom Settings menu P 3 Multi selector OFF MENU button To display the menus press REET the MENU button Select ZV AES AE amp flash o Custom Setting e5 Auto a e a bracketing set in the A e ii Custom Settings menu O mi ADL bracketing highlight an option and press Choose AE amp button flash to vary both exposure and flash level AE only to vary only exposure or Flash only to vary only flash level 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel 7 Number of shots BKT button Main command Control panel dial Exposure and flash bracketi
172. e color temperature from list of E4 Choosecolortemp 14 000K values 152 Use subject light source or existing PRE Preset manual photograph as reference for white balance M 154 All values are approximate and do not reflect fine tuning if applicable White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel F e WB button Main command dial Control panel The Shooting Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the F SHOOTING MENU r FA re Image area White balance option in the shooting menu E EREN CQ 268 which also can be used to fine tune NEF RAW recording White balance AUTOS white balance M 148 or measure a value for 7 Set Picture Control preset white balance 154 The Auto option aE aa in the White balance menu offers a choice of P Active D Lighting Normal and Keep warm lighting colors which preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent lighting while the Fluorescent option can be used to select the light source from the bulb types Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set M 307 the
173. e deleted Full Frame and Thumbnail Playback Press the tm t button to delete the current photograph 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the T m button A confirmation dialog will be displayed i rma Full frame playback Thumbnail playback button 3 Press the sam button again To delete the photograph press the i a button To exit without deleting the photograph press the P button e button See Also The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted 266 235 The Playback Menu The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options Note that depending on the number of images some time may be required for deletion Option Description Sas Selected Delete selected pictures Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for ALL All playback CQ 260 If two cards are inserted you can select the card from which pictures will be deleted HE Selected Deleting Selected Photographs 1 Choose Selected for the g Delete Delete option in the playback menu Selected ALL All Press the MENU button and select Delete in the playback menu Highlight Selected and press P MENU button 2 Highlight a picture z Delete Selected
174. e multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the f rm button Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long Any characters after the nineteenth will be deleted 7 Save changes and exit Press to save changes and exit The new Picture Control will appear in the Picture Control list ro Nikon _ T button Set Picture Control ESD Standard e ENL Neutral EVI Vivid EMC Monochrome EPT Portrait ELS Landscape Grid CAdiust Manage Picture Control gt Rename Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu Manage Picture Control gt Delete The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer needed The Original Picture Control Icon The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display Manage Picture Control al Save edit Delete Load save Original Picture Control icon VIVID 02 al Sharpening Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue Grid Reset MOK 171 172 Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility availab
175. e pixels 36 3 million Image sensor Image sensor 35 9 x 24 0 mm CMOS sensor Nikon FX format Total pixels 36 8 million Dust reduction System Image sensor cleaning Image Dust Off reference data requires optional Capture NX 2 software Storage Image size pixels FX 36x24 image area 7 360 x 4 912 L 5 520 x 3 680 M 3 680 x 2 456 S e 1 2x 3020 image area 6 144 x 4 080 L 4 608 x 3 056 M 3 072 x 2 040 S DX 24x 16 image area 4 800 x 3 200 L 3 600 x 2 400 M 2 400 x 1 600 S e 5 4 30X24 image area 6 144 x 4 912 L 4 608 x 3 680 M 3 072 x 2 456 S FX format photographs taken in movie live view 6 720 x 3 776 L 5 040 x 2 832 M 3 360 x 1 888 S DX format photographs in movie live view 4 800 x 2 704 L 3 600 x 2 024 M 2 400 x 1 352 S Note Photographs taken in movie live view have an aspect ratio of 16 9 A DX based format is used for photographs taken using the DX 24 x 16 1 5x image area an FX based format is used for all other photographs Storage File format NEF RAW 12 or 14 bit lossless compressed compressed or uncompressed TIFF RGB JPEG JPEG Baseline compliant with fine approx 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression Size priority Optimal quality compression available NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Can be selected from
176. e quality JPEG images and copies created from TIFF RGB photos are saved as fine quality JPEG images of the same size as the original Size priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format 343 D Lighting MENU button gt gh retouch menu D Lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs Press A or W to choose the amount of Dighting correction performed The effect can be ff Te previewed in the edit display Press to copy Ss the photograph m E L OKAT 344 Red Eye Correction MENU button gt gh retouch menu This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using a flash The photograph selected for red eye correction can be previewed in the edit display Confirm the effects of red eye correction and create a copy as described in the following table Note that red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before proceeding To Use Description Press amp to zoom in Sto Q zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi Zoom out QE selector to view areas of image not visible in View other monitor Keep multi a V areas of image selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation window is displayed when zoom
177. ease button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will blink 6 Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 8 7 Clean the filter Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter 8 Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Replace the lens or body cap 7 Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End
178. ected files can not be deleted using the f r button or the Delete option in the playback menu Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted 1 32 326 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list NSS E 100ND800 DSc_0001 JPG NORMAL 10 01 2012 10 03 34 m07360x4912 Te 100 2 ee 3 Fai 4 2 Press the On amp 2 button The photograph will be marked with a bl icon To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted display the f E 100ND800 T A Pe 10 01 2012 10 0 07360 Om amp button photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the Om 2 7 button Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the O n E4 and fi 2 buttons together for about two seconds during playback 233 234 Deleting Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list press the i button To delete multiple selected photographs or all photographs in the current playback folder use the Delete option in the playback menu Once deleted photographs can not be recovered Note that pictures that are protected or hidden can not b
179. ed by in top right corner of monitor last frame by If playback is paused movie rewinds or advances one frame at a time keep pressed for continuous rewind or advance Play Rewind advance 72 To Use Description Use main command dial to skip to next or previous index or to skip to the last or first Skip ahead frame if the movie contains no indices if the back eS movie is more than 30 s long rotating the main command dial when the last frame is displayed skips back 30 s Adjust volume amp 3 Press to increase volume amp amp to decrease Trim movie S See page 74 for more information Exit SY Exit to full frame playback Return to shooting v Press the shutter release button halfway to mode EA exit to shooting mode Display menus MENU See page 259 for more information The Icon Movies with indices M 63 are indicated by a icon in full frame playback E 100ND800 DSC_00 10 01 2012 11 1 The N Icon N is displayed in full frame and movie playback if the movie was recorded without sound G Ed 100ND800 DSC_0013 01 1 10 01 2012 11 12 73 74 Editing Movies Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills Option Description Create a copy from which the opening or closing footage has been removed R Saveselectedframe Save a selected f
180. ed by an asterisk ee Star X in the Set Picture Control menu C EPT Portrait Landscape Grid GAdiust 165 166 HE Picture Control Settings Option Description Quick adjust Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid Not available with Neutral Monochrome or custom Picture Controls Sharpening Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adjust sharpening automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 0 no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening Contrast s 01 U0 d4n gt I IlL syuawysnfpe jenuey Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low contrast subjects Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced Brightness brightness Does not affect exposure gt Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust S Saturation saturation automatically according to the type of scene E z or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower values 3 A reduce saturation and highe
181. ed crop is displayed in the viewfinder M 81 button Image area fal Choose image area GFX WI 1 2x 30x20 1 2x 36x24 1 0x C DX 24x16 1 5x E 5 4 30x24 M Auto DX Crop The Fn button can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is attached and Auto DX crop is on Image Size Image size varies with the option selected for image area Camera Controls 1 Assign image area selection to a camera control Select Choose image area as the button command dials option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu 278 Image area selection can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f4 Assign Fn button 1 311 the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button M 315 or the it AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button M 315 2 Use the selected control to choose an image area The image area can be selected by pressing the M selected button and rotating A the main or sub command dial S until the desired crop is displayed in the viewfinder Fn button Main 2 81 command dial Gs 24 The option currently selected for image area can be viewed by pressing the button to display the image area in the control panel viewfinder or information display FX format is displayed as 36 24 1 2 x as 30 20 DX format as 24 16 and5 4as 30 24
182. ed in the control panel QUAL button Main command dial Control panel NEF RAW Images NEF RAW images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2 available separately N 389 or ViewNX 2 available on the supplied ViewNX 2 installer CD JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu 41 353 NEF JPEG When photographs taken at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are viewed on the camera with only one memory card inserted only the JPEG image will be displayed If both copies are recorded to the same memory card both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted If the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the Secondary slot function gt RAW primary JPEG secondary option deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF RAW image The Image Quality Menu x Image quality can also be adjusted using the EE Shooting menu bank Image quality option in the shooting menu Storage folder File naming a 268 Primary slot selection Secondary slot function Image quality T Image size 5 SHOOTING MENU 85 The following options can be SHOOTING MENU Image area JPEG compression accessed from the shooting menu Press the MENU button to display the menus highlight n the desired option and press gt Color space Active D Lighting MENU button NEF RAW recording White balance OCRE
183. ee the section for the selected item To exit without creating a retouched copy press MENU Monitor off Delay The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for a brief period Any unsaved changes will be lost To increase the time the monitor remains on choose a longer menu display time for Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay 292 342 4 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a icon button Creating Retouched Copies During Playback Retouched copies can also be created during playback RETOUCH MENU iy D ighting Red eye correction W Trim O Monochrome Filter effects i Onal Cancel MSave Display picture full Highlight option and Create retouched frame and press press copy vV Retouching Copies Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options although with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie gt Choose start end point each option can be applied only once note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail Options that can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with Trim Image overlay NEF RAW processing and Resize copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fin
184. eed mode M 104 during interval timer photography this i setting also determines the frame advance Pa ap Sy PS rate for single frame gt d3 Max Continuous Release mEn button gt Custom settings menu The maximum number of shots that can be 43 Max continuous release taken in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100 The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3 shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills 00 See page 436 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer d4 Exposure Delay Mode MENU button gt Custom Settings menu In situations where the slightest camera 44 Exposure delay mode movement can blur pictures select 1 s 2 s or 3 s to delay shutter release until one two or three seconds after the mirror is raised 293 d5 File Number Sequence MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When a photograph is taken the camera a5 File number sequence names the file by adding one to the last file number used This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last Pas number used when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Option Description When a new folder is created the memory card formatted or a new memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file On
185. eee 243 248 A Headphone connector ssee 65 E HDMI mini pin connector 256 BE Mounting index eres H Lens release button g AF mode button 48 50 92 94 iV Focus mode selector 48 91 101 Meter coupling levet ss 426 g MIO unanenn M The Microphone and Speaker Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices Camera Body Continued AF assist illuminator 286 Self timer lamp 00 107 Red eye reduction lamp B Sub command dial uu 317 Depth of field preview button Fn function button E ne ee eee 83 191 311 321 EER 63 117 315 322 5 Power connector COVEef uw 391 J Battery chamber cover latch 21 Battery chamber covet sssssssssss 21 Contact cover for optional i MB D12 battery pack e 387 F Tripod socket g LEMS MOUNLL sssssesssccccccssssesees 25 102 EH CPU contacts 12 Body caD 24 389 LCD IIluminators activates the exposure meters and control panel backlight LCD remain lit for six seconds while the exposure meters are active or until Rotating the power switch toward 8 illuminator allowing the display to be read in the dark After the power switch is released the illuminators will Power switch the shutter is released or the po
186. eeecsesenseeeeee 38 436 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 105 436 Exposure compensation value 130 Flash compensation value Flash ready indicator BEY FV lock indicator essen 191 GE Flash sync indicator 299 EJ Aperture stop indicator 121 374 Exposure indicatF sssecsseeeee 123 Exposure compensation Gisplay 0 esscccssesscecsseesccessneseessneecs 130 EZ Low battery warning sss 37 Exposure and flash bracketing indica t niny 133 WB bracketing indicator 137 ADL bracketing indicator 141 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 112 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES eessesecseecssesssseessscsseecsseesees 38 M No Battery When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted 7 The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and the response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The Information Display Shooting information including shutter speed aperture number of exposures remaining and AF area mode is displayed in the monitor when the M button is
187. ely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF compliant applications and printers that support DCF will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support DCF select the appropriate color space manually An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space allowing applications that support color management to automatically select the correct color space For more information see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software ViewNxX 2 supplied and Capture NX 2 available separately automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with this camera Vignette Control MENU button gt shooting menu Vignetting is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G and D lenses DX and PC lenses excluded Its effects vary f
188. emote flash units take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used the practical maximum is three With more than this number the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance e4 Modeling Flash MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If On is selected when the camera is used Modeling flash with the built in flash or an optional CLS compatible flash unit N 381 a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed 117 No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected e5 Auto Bracketing Set MENU button gt Custom settings menu Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing 132 is in effect Choose AE amp flash AE to perform both exposure and flash level bracketing AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only to perform only flash level bracketing WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing 1 137 or ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D Lighting Q 141 Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG 307 308 e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M menu button gt Custom Settings menu This option determines which settings are affected when AE amp flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e5 in manual exposure mode Opt
189. ended to prevent blurring caused by camera slowsync hake Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to 5 capture both subject and background at night or under fou dim light This mode is only available in programmed auto and aperture priority auto exposure modes Use of Slow sync tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake baa Rear curtain sync In shutter priority auto or manual exposure 4 mode flash fires just before the shutter SLOW foal closes Use to create effect of a stream of light behind moving objects In programmed auto and aperture priority auto slow rear curtain sync is used to capture both subject and background Use of tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake 183 184 Shutter Speeds and Apertures Available with the Built in Flash Mode Shutter speed Aperture See page p Set automatically by camera 3 118 1 250 s 1 60 s 12 Set automatically 5 Value selected by user by camera 119 1 250 s 30 s 2 A Set automatically by camera 120 1 250 s 60 s 12 Value selected M Value selected by user by user 122 i 1 250 S 30 S tini bi 2 1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync slow rear curtain sync and slow sync with red eye reduction flash modes 2 Speeds as fast as s 000 s are available with optional flash units A 382 when 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP is selected f
190. ens auto shutter speed selection can be fine tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing for example faster values can be used with telephoto lenses to reduce blur Shutter speeds slower than the minimum value may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity Press to exit when settings are complete When On is selected the viewfinder and control panel show ISO AUTO When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user these indicators blink and the altered value is shown in the viewfinder A C Co n a ma Turning Auto ISO Sensitivity Control on or Off You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or off by pressing the ISO button and rotating the sub command dial ISO AUTO is displayed when auto ISO sensitivity control is on i225 FAA g iso auTo maa ii 113 114 ESE Exposure Metering Metering determines how the camera sets exposure The following options are available Option Description Matrix Produces natural results in most situations Camera meters a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to tone distribution color composition and with type G or D lenses 373 distance information 3D color matrix metering III with other CPU lenses camera uses color matrix metering III which does not include 3D distance information With non
191. enses can not be used see page 374 Range of rotation for Al 80 200mm f 2 8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body Filters can not be exchanged while Al 200 400mm f 4 ED is mounted on camera If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data X 212 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data M 212 Use spot or center weighted metering if desired results are not achieved For improved precision specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non CPU lens data 2 212 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting lens In manual exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens Exposure compensation required when used with Al 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 or AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D See teleconverter manual for details Requires PK 12 or PK 13 auto extension ring PB 6D may be required depending on camera orientation Use preset aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph PF 4 Reprocopy Outfit requir
192. ensitivity and card slot options are available in the Movie settings menu M 70 Focus can be adjusted manually as described on page 55 The roles played by the center of the multi selector the Fn depth of field preview and tet AE L AF L buttons can be chosen using Custom Settings f2 Multi selector center button 309 g1 Assign Fn button N 321 g2 Assign preview button 322 and g3 Assign AE L AF L button 2 323 this option also allows exposure to be locked without keeping the it AE L AF L button pressed respectively Custom Setting g4 Assign shutter button 324 controls whether the shutter release button can be used to start movie live view or to start and end movie recording 61 62 7 End recording Press the movie record button again to end recording Recording will end automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full Maximum Length The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB for maximum recording times see page 70 note that depending on memory card write speed shooting may end before this length is reached CO 434 Taking Photographs To take a photograph while recording is in progress press the shutter release button all the way down Movie recording will end the footage recorded to that point will be saved and the camera will return to live view The photograph will be recorded at the current image area setting using a crop wit
193. ent temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance Capacity may be reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 C 32 F to 15 C 59 F and from 45 C 113 F to 60 C 140 F If the CHARGE lamp flickers i e flashes about eight times a second during charging confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery If the problem persists cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative Do not short the charger terminals failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the charger Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging Failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 C 41 F the battery life indicator in the Battery info 2 332 display may show a temporary decrease The battery may be hot immediately after use Wait for the battery to cool before recharging The
194. er close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in photographs or interfering with exposure 4 Start the timer Press the shutter release button all the way down to g start the timer The self timer lamp will start to blink Two seconds before the photograph is taken the self timer lamp will stop blinking The shutter will be released about ten seconds after the timer starts To turn the self timer off before a photograph is taken turn the release mode dial to another setting bulb Time bulb exposures can not be recorded using the self timer A fixed shutter speed will be used if a speed of tis i tris selected in exposure mode M Using the Built in Flash Before taking a photograph with the flash press the flash pop up button to raise the flash and wait for the indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder Q 181 Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self timer has started Note that only one photograph will be taken when the flash fires regardless of the number of exposures selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer M 291 See Also For information on choosing the duration of the self timer the number of shots taken and the interval between shots see Custom Setting c3 Self timer Q 291 For information on setting a beep to sound during the timer count down see Custom Setting d1 Bee
195. erforms same function as gt button Select when using a telephoto lens or in other circumstances Playback in which it is difficult to operate the gt button with your left hand Accesstop Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in MY fim iteminMY MENU Select this option for quick access to a MENU frequently used menu item If image quality is set to JPEG fine JPEG normal or JPEG basic RAW will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF RAW copy will be recorded with the NEF next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed to RAW record NEF RAW copies with a series of photographs keep the shutter release button pressed halfway between shots To exit without recording an NEF RAW copy press the Fn button again 312 Option Description Viewfinder A AT Press the Fn button to view a virtual horizon display in virtual e e a the viewfinder see below horizon None No operation is performed when the Fn button is pressed This option can not be used in combination with Fn button command dials M 314 Selecting this option displays a message and sets Fn button command dials to None If another option is selected for Fn button command dials while this setting is active Fn button press will be set to None Virtual Horizon When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for Fn button press pressing the Fn button displays a pitch and roll indi
196. erture using the Non CPU lens data option in the setup menu C0 212 Non CPU lenses can be used only in exposure modes A and M 1117 aperture can be adjusted using the lens aperture ring Depending on the scene exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live view is not used Metering in live view is adjusted to suit the live view display producing photographs with exposure close to 55 56 m Shooting in Live View Mode To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter 1 106 Although they will not appear in the final picture flicker banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame flicker and banding can be reduced using Flicker reduction A 329 Bright light sources may leave after images in the monitor when the camera is panned Bright spots may also appear When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Live view ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits exit live view when the camera is not in use Note that the temperature of the camera s internal circuits may
197. es PA 4 Camera Holder Noise in the form of horizontal lines may appear in pictures taken with AF S Zoom Nikkor 24 85 mm f 3 5 4 5G IF lenses at ISO sensitivities over 6400 use manual focus or focus lock Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses CPU lenses particularly types G and D are recommended but note that IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring CPU contacts Aperture ring CPU lens j Type G lens Type D lens The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF I teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF I lenses AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED VRII AF I 300mm f 2 8D ED AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED AF S 300mm f 4D ED AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR AF S VR Micro Nikkor 105mm f 2 8G AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II IF ED e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S NIKKOR 200mm f 2G ED VRII_ AF I 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR 2 AF S NIKKOR 200 400mm f 4G ED AF S 500mm f 4D ED II VR Il AF S 500mm f 4D ED 2 AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED 2 AF 1 500mm f 4D ED 2 AF S NIKKOR 300mm f 2 8G ED VR II AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED AF S 600mm f 4D ED II AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED II AF S 600mm f 4D ED AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED AF I 600mm f 4D ED 2
198. ess A or W to view photo information M 222 or lt press the amp button to zoom in z a ee on the current frame M 231 press gt to exit zoom To view six pictures at a time press the center of the multi selector Use the multi selector to highlight pictures or press the center of the multi selector again to display the highlighted picture full frame To view images in other locations press S when thumbnails are displayed and select the desired card and folder as described on page 221 2 Display printing Won Setup Start printing options Page size Press to display PictBrid inti oii ge printing Aa P doia options button 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press gt to select Option Description Highlight a page size only sizes supported by the current printer are listed and press to select and exit to the previous menu to print at the default page size for the current printer select Printer default No of Press A or W to choose number of copies maximum 99 copies then press to select and return to the previous menu Page size 249 Option Description Border This option is available only if supported by the printer Highlight Printer default use current printer settings Print with border print photo with white border or No border and press to select and exit to the previous menu
199. ess Description Skip back skip Press lt to return to previous frame gt to skip ahead to next frame View additional Change photo info displayed still images photo info only M 222 Pause resume Pause or resume slide show et oo MENU End slide show and return to playback menu Exit to playback 5 End slide show and exit to full frame M 219 mode or thumbnail playback 1 219 Exit to shooting _ Press shutter release button halfway to return mode L S to shooting mode The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu 2s Frame interval E Eit 267 amp The Shooting Menu Shooting Options To display the shooting menu press MENU and select the amp shooting menu tab SHOOTING MENU cs SHOOTING MENU 5 Storage folder 100 File naming DSC Primary slot selection 0D E Secondary slot function che Image quality NORM Image size MENU button Option aa Option m Shooting menu bank 269 Manage Picture Control 169 Extended menu banks 270 Color space 274 Storage folder 271 Active D Lighting 174 File naming 273 HDR high dynamic range 176 Primary slot selection 89 Vignette control 275 Secondary slot function 89 Auto distortion control 276 Image quality 84 Long exposure NR 277 Image size 87 High ISONR 277 Image area 79 ISO sensitivity s
200. ettings 109 JPEG compression 86 Multiple exposure 195 NEF RAW recording 86 Interval timer shooting 201 White balance 145 Time lapse photography 207 Set Picture Control 163 Movie settings 70 See Also Menu defaults are listed on page 405 268 Shooting Menu Bank MENU button gt a shooting menu Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks With the exceptions of Extended menu banks Interval timer shooting Multiple exposure Time lapse photography and modifications to Picture Controls quick adjust and other manual adjustments changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption of up to 20 characters in length can be added by highlighting the menu bank and pressing as described on page 170 Shooting Menu Bank The information display shows the current shooting menu bank See Also Exposure mode shutter speed and aperture can be included in shoo
201. ettings menu Choose how long the monitor remains on c4 Monitor off delay when no operations are performed during Playback playback Playback defaults to 10 s and Menus r P Information display image review Image review defaults to 4 s Image review when menus Menus defaults to 1 minute Liveview or information Information display defaults to 10 s are displayed or during live view and movie recording Live view defaults to 10 minutes Choose a shorter monitor off delay for longer battery life d Shooting Display d1 Beep MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses using single servo AF M 91 when focus locks during live view photography while the release timer is counting down in self timer mode M 106 when time lapse photography ends M 207 or if you attempt to take a photograph when the memory card is locked M 34 Note that a beep will not sound in movie live view M 59 or quiet shutter release mode mode Q m 103 regardless of the option selected Volume Choose 3 high 2 medium 1 low or Off mute When an option other than Off is selected appears in the control panel and information display Pitch Choose High or Low d2 CL Mode Shooting Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the maximum frame advance rate in a2 CL mode shooting speed CL continuous low sp
202. f Apple Inc in the United States and or other countries Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries The SD SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD 3C LLC CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation HDMI the HMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC PictBridge is a trademark All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Approved Memory Cards The camera accepts the SD and CompactFlash memory cards listed in the following sections Other cards have not been tested For more details on the cards listed below please contact the manufacturer BE SD Memory Cards The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the camera Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are recommended for movie recording Recording may end unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used SD cards SDHC cards SDXC cards aoe 4GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB Toshiba 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB i 4 f d t 48 GB 64 GB Panasonic 2GB 16 GB 24 GB 32 GB Lexar Media 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB Peun 4GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB Professional Full HD Video 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 1 Check that any car
203. focal lengths of 24 200 mm It can not however be used to assist the focus operation with the following lenses AF S VR Nikkor 200mm f 2G IF ED AF S NIKKOR 200 400mm f 4G ED AF S NIKKOR 200mm f 2G ED VR II VR II AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 200 400mm f 4G IF ED At ranges under 0 7 m 2 ft 4 in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF S NIKKOR 16 35mm f 4G ED VR_ AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED AF S Zoom Nikkor 17 35mm AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 24 120mm f 2 8D IF ED f 3 5 5 6G IF ED AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 17 55mm AF S Zoom Nikkor ED 28 70mm f 2 8G IF ED f 2 8D IF AF S DX NIKKOR 18 200mm f 3 5 AF Micro Nikkor 200mm f 4D IF ED 5 6G ED VR Il At ranges under 1 1 m 3 ft 7 in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF S NIKKOR 24 120mm f 4G ED AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 55 200mm VR f 4 5 6G ED AF S NIKKOR 28 300mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR At ranges under 1 5 m 4ft 11 in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED AF Zoom Nikkor 70 300mm f 4 AF S VR Zoom Nikkor ED 70 5 6G 200mm f2 8G IF AF Zoom Nikkor 80 200mm f 2 8D AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED ED VR II AF S Zoom Nikkor 80 200mm f 2 8D IF ED At ranges under 2 3 m 7 ft 7 in the following lenses may block the AF
204. focus point can be selected from any of the wo 51 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focus ring until the in focus indicator is displayed Note that with the subjects listed on page 100 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between 7 Vien your subject and the camera measure Se from the focal plane mark e on the _ 46 5mm camera body M 2 The distance between the lens mounting flange and a the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in esa Focal plane mark 102 Release Mode Choosing a Release Mode To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting Mode Description S Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release Single frame button is pressed While shutter release button is held down camera takes CL photographs at frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 Continuous CL mode shooting speed 293 Lower built in flash low speed _ 1 182 continuous release is not available while flash is raised cH While shutter release button is held down camera records photographs at frame ra
205. g permanently deletes all pictures and other data i on the card in the selected slot Before CF card slot formatting be sure to make backup copies as required vV During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the and MODE m buttons for more than two seconds M 32 Monitor Brightness MENU button gt Y setup menu Adjust the brightness of the monitor for playback menus and the information display Option Description When the monitor is on monitor brightness is automatically Auto adjusted according to ambient lighting conditions Care should be taken not to cover the ambient brightness sensor 215 Press A or W to choose monitor brightness Choose higher Manual values for increased brightness lower values for reduced brightness See Also For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view see page 53 326 Image Dust Off Ref Photo MENU button gt Y setup menu Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 available separately for more information see the Capture NX 2 manual Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A non DX lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in 1 Choose astart option Image Dust Off ref
206. h or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program During Shooting During interval timer photography the icon will blink in the control panel Immediately before the next shooting interval begins the shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval At other times the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway once the button is released the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off To view current interval timer settings select Interval timer shooting Interval timer shooting between shots While a soe ause interval timer photography is in progress the off interval timer menu will show the starting time ae In progress lt s 00 01 00 the shooting interval and the number of 00 01 00 erates intervals and shots remaining None of these items can be changed while interval timer
207. h an aspect ratio of 16 9 Note that the exposure for photographs can not be previewed during movie live view mode F 5 or A is recommended but accurate results can be achieved in mode M by adjusting exposure during live view photography 2 45 and then rotating the live view selector to 4 and checking the image area Exposure compensation for the photograph can be set to values between 5 and 5 EV but only values between 3 and 3 can be previewed in the monitor M 130 The Count Down Display A count down will be displayed 30 s before movie recording ends automatically Q 51 Depending on shooting conditions the timer may appear immediately when movie recording begins Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available live view will still end automatically when the timer expires Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming movie recording 8 Exit live view mode Press the button to exit live view mode Indices If Index marking is selected for Custom Setting g2 Assign preview button M 322 you can press the depth of field preview button during recording to add indices that can be used to locate frames during editing and playback 1 73 Up to 20 indices can be added to each movie Depth of field preview button 63 64 The Live View Display Movie Live View AF S ina DEEA 1080 fe 0 82 Eo D O HA EG
208. he edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at image areas other than DX 24x16 1 5x Auto Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses PC fisheye and certain other lenses excluded Results are not guaranteed with other lenses Fisheye MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye lens Press to increase the effect this also increases the amount that will be cropped out at the edges of the image lt to reduce it The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph or press to exit to playback without creating a copy Color Outline MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for painting The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press amp to copy the photograph yA J awT e l E Veh g Before Color Sketch MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create a copy of a photograph that resembles Color sketch a sketch made with colored pencils Press A or to highlight Vividness or Outlines and press lt or gt to change Vividness can be MERES increased to make colors more saturated or OnE decreased for a washed out monochromatic effect while outlines can be made thicker or thinner Thicker outlines makes colors more saturated The results can be previewed in the edit display Press amp to copy the photograph
209. he desired focus can be achieved The DK 17C is equipped with a safety lock Magnifying Eyepiece DK 17M The DK 17M magnifies the view through the viewfinder by approximately 1 2 x for greater precision when framing The DK 17M is equipped with a safety lock Eyepiece Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene at the center of the viewfinder for more accurate focus DK 18 eyepiece adapter available separately required Eyepiece Adapter DK 18 The DK 18 is used when attaching the DG 2 magnifier or DR 3 right angle viewing attachment to the D800 Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK 14 Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK 17A These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions The DK 17A is equipped with a safety lock Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 5 Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 4 The DR 5 and DR 4 attach to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting position The DR 5 supports diopter adjustment and can also magnify the view through the viewfinder by 2 x for greater precision when framing note that the edges of the frame will not be visible when the view is magnified Filters Filters intended for special effects photography may interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder The D800 can not be used with linear polarizing filters Use the C PL or C PLII circular polarizing filter instead Use NC filter
210. hile turning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap I CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring 373 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number Image Area The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is attached M 79 Image area 25 Basic Setup The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first time menus are displayed Choose a language and set the time and date Note that if the time and date are not set will blink in the monitor and the time and date recorded with photographs will be incorrect 1 Turn the camera on Power switch eal 2 Select Language in the setup menu Press MENU to display the camera menus then select Language in the setup menu MENU button For information on using SETUP MENU menus see Using Camera n Auto i tati ON Menus 21 16 et iY et Image comment E Copyright information OFF Save load settings gt GPS 3 Selecta language Language e tina 4 n Dansk Press A or W to highlight Deutsch N Enis the desired language and Espa ol press Francais Indonesia Italiano button 26 4 select Time zone and date SETUP MENU Format memory card Monitor brightness Select Time zone and date
211. his item is only available if a GPS device is connected when it displays the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading if supported as reported by the GPS device Use GPS to set camera clock Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device Disable 218 More About Playback Viewing Images 00 3 j Full frame playback Thumbnail playback Full Frame Playback To play photographs back press the gt button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or P to view additional information on the current photograph press A or W M 222 Thumbnail Playback To view multiple images press the 9 button when P button o images displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each 6 time the 9 amp 3 button is pressed and decreases with lo a picture is displayed full frame The number of each press of the amp button Use the multi selector to highlight images and press the center of the multi at button selector to view the highlighted image full frame CE 219 220 Playback Controls fi x Delete the current picture M 234 MENU View the menus 259 O n 4 Protect the current picture M 233 Q Zoom in M 231 QE View multiple images 219 Display
212. i Te i p at the top of the display Press Soe ned lt or P to switch between the image o source image and the retouched copy To view the highlighted picture full frame press and hold the amp button If the copy was created from two images using Image overlay press A or W to view the other source image If multiple copies exist for the current source image press A or W to view the other copies To exit to playback press the P button or press to exit to playback with the highlighted image selected m Side by Side Comparison The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that was protected M 233 is on a locked memory card or has since been deleted or hidden A 260 365 My Menu Recent Settings To display My Menu press MENU and select the My Menu tab 5 MY MENU Image quality JPEG compression MY MENU gt 4 Tye 9 44 Asian Fn button LM Add items 4 O i 4 EB Remove items A Rank items v Choose tab M MENU button The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus for quick access up to 20 items If desired recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu 370 Options can be added deleted and reordered as described on the following pages 366 BE Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items In My Menu
213. i cards on and off but may not support other Eye Fi functions Supported Eye Fi Cards As of September 2011 the camera supports 8 GB SDHC Pro X2 Eye Fi cards Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions consult the manufacturer for more information Eye Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase Be sure the Eye Fi card firmware has been updated to the latest version Using Eye Fi Cards in Ad Hoc Mode Additional time may be required when connecting using Eye Fi cards that support ad hoc mode such as the Eye Fi Pro X2 SDHC 8 GB Set Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay M 291 to 30 s or longer Firmware Version MENU button gt Y setup menu View the current camera firmware version K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies To display the retouch menu press MENU and select the amp retouch menu tab wy RSi MENU button RETOUCH MENU E Color balance Image overlay NEF RAW processing RETOUCH MENU The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of existing pictures The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera note that if the memory card is being used to store both RAW NEF and JPEG copies of the same photographs as described on page 84 retouch other than Image overlay and NEF RAW processing apply only to the JPEG copies
214. icing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep away from strong magnetic fields Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effe
215. icon is displayed when the DX based movie format is selected FX format 35 9 x 24 DX format 23 4 x 15 6 display 2 80 display 80 FX based movie i DX based movie format 32 8 x 18 4 display format 23 4 x 13 2 display HDMI If the camera is connected to an HDMI device M 57 the view through the lens will appear both in the camera monitor and on the HDMI device The indicators that appear in the HDMI device during movie recording are shown at right The camera monitor does not show the sound level virtual horizon or histogram indicators in the monitor and on the HDMI device can not be hidden or displayed using the M button 67 68 Movie Live View Photographs The following table shows the size of photographs taken in movie live view Image area Option Size pixels Print size cm in FX based format 6 720 x 3 776 56 9 x 32 0 22 4 x 12 6 5 040 x 2 832 42 7 x 24 0 16 8 x 9 4 3 360 x 1 888 28 4 x 16 0 11 2x 6 3 DX based format 4 800 x 2 704 40 6 x 22 9 16 0 x 9 0 3 600 x 2 024 30 5 x 17 1 12 0 x 6 7 Wnerwner 2 400 x 1 352 20 3 x 11 4 8 0x 4 5 Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Image quality is determined by the option selected for Image quality in the shooti
216. icon will be displayed in the control panel 3 Choose the number of shots Highlight Number of shots and press gt Press A or W to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press Multiple exposure 5 Multiple exposure mode NS Number of shots p Auto gain ON Multiple exposure ica Number of shots The BKT Button If Multiple exposure is selected for Custom Setting f8 Assign BKT button CO 316 you can select the multiple exposure mode by pressing the BKT button and rotating the main command dial and the number of shots by pressing the BKT button and rotating the sub command dial The mode and number of shots are shown in the control panel and appear when On series is selected and when On single photo is selected no icon appears when multiple exposure is off 197 198 4 Choose the amount of Multinle exposure gain a Multiple exposure mode NS Highlight Auto gain and press gt The following options will Multile exposure r n Auto gai be displayed Highlight an a option and press mE On Gain is adjusted a according to number of exposures actually recorded gain for each exposure is set to 1 2 for 2 exposures 3 for 3 exposures etc Off Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure Recommended if background is dark Frame a photograph focus and sho
217. igh iH High EN Normal oK mL Low Off camera will automatically adjust Active D Lighting button according to shooting conditions in exposure mode M however amp amp A Auto is equivalent to amp N Normal M Active D Lighting Active D Lighting can not be used with movies Noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines may appear in photographs taken with Active D Lighting Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects Active D Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0 3 or above See Also When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set M 307 the camera varies Active D Lighting over a series of shots See page 141 for more information 175 176 High Dynamic Range HDR High Dynamic Range HDR combines two exposures to form a single image that captures a wide range of tones from shadows to highlights even with high contrast subjects HDR is most effective when used with matrix metering N 115 with other metering methods an exposure differential of Auto is equivalent to about 2 EV It can not be used to record NEF RAW images Movie recording 59 flash lighting bracketing A 132 multiple exposure M 195 and time lapse photography CQ 207 can not be used while HDR is in effect and a shutter speed of tur i is not available First exposure Second exposure Combined HDR darker brighter image 1
218. ightness Example Subject is half in the shade Background objects appear larger than the subject Example A building is in the frame behind the subject 3 The subject contains many fine details Example A field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness Manual Focus Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus non AF NIKKOR lenses or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results A 100 AF S lenses Set the lens focus mode switch to M AF lenses Set the lens focus mode switch if present and camera focus mode selector to M vV AF Lenses Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus mode switch set to M and Focus mode the camera focus mode selector selector set to AF Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or lens Manual focus lenses Set the camera focus mode selector to M To focus manually adjust the lens focus ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus vt my ws 101 The Electronic Rangefinder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the
219. ime Exposures Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure Nikon recommends using a fully charged EN EL15 battery or an optional EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open Note that noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may be present in long exposures before shooting choose On for the Long exposure NR option in the shooting menu M 277 Select exposure MODE button mode M Press the MODE rmm button and rotate the main command dial until M is displayed in the Main command dial control panel Choose a shutter speed While the exposure meters are on rotate the main command dial until kur by appears in the shutter speed displays The exposure indicators do not appear when kuti i is selected Press the shutter release button all the way down Press the shutter release button on the camera or remote cord all the way down The shutter will remain open while the shutter release button is pressed Release the shutter release button Remove your finger from the shutter release button to record the photograph 125 a hd 126 Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock Shutter speed lock is available in shutter priority auto and manual exposure modes aperture lock in aperture priority auto and
220. in increments of 3 EV M Choose the flash level from values between 1 1 and 1 128 1 128 of full power The built in flash does not fire although remote flash units do The built in flash must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre flashes GroupA Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A TIL i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Auto aperture available only with compatible flash units AA 01 382 Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV M Choose the flash level from values between 1 1 and 1 128 1 128 of full power The flash units in this group do not fire Group B Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B The options available are the same as those listed for Group A above Channel Choose from channels 1 4 All flash units in both groups must be set to the same channel 303 304 Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode 1 Adjust settings for the built in flash Choose the flash control mode and output level for the built in flash Note that output level can not be adjusted in mode Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode Mode Comp 7 Built in flash o TTL o Group A Group B Channel Adjust settings for group A Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group A Flash cntrl for built in fla
221. includes spot lighting or a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent mercury vapor sodium vapor or similar lighting Across star filter or other special filter is used The subject appears smaller than the focus point The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns e g blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper e The subject is moving 47 Focusing in Live View To focus using autofocus rotate the focus mode selector to AF and follow the steps below to choose autofocus and AF area modes For information on focusing manually see page 55 Focus mode selector BE Choosing a Focus Mode The following autofocus modes are available in live view Mode Description AF S Single servo AF For stationary subjects Focus locks when shutter release button is pressed halfway Full time servo AF For moving subjects Camera focuses AF F continuously until shutter release button is pressed Focus locks when shutter release button is pressed halfway To choose an autofocus mode press the AF mode button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the monitor AF mode Main command Monitor button dial 48 Choosing an AF Area Mode The following AF area modes can be selected in live view Mode Description Face priority AF Use for portraits The came
222. ing PC mode Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network Print mode computer For more information see the WT 4 user s manual Be sure to update to the latest versions of the wireless transmitter firmware and supplied software M Transfer Mode When Wireless transmitter gt Mode gt Transfer mode is selected in the camera setup menu the button is used during playback to select pictures for upload preventing it from being used to select pictures for other operations such as side by side comparison M 364 To restore normal operation select another option for Wireless transmitter gt Mode Recording and Viewing Movies During Transfer Movies can not be recorded or played back in image transfer mode when a WT 4 is connected to the camera image transfer mode applies when images are being transferred and when images remain to be sent 245 246 Movies The WT 4 can be used to upload movies in transfer mode if Auto send or Send folder is not selected for Transfer settings Movies can not be uploaded in thumbnail select mode Thumbnail Select Mode Camera settings can not be changed from the computer in thumbnail select mode Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 software available separately 1 389 can be used to control the camera from a computer When Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture photographs directly to th
223. ing Default Settings To restore default settings ettin Settings in the selected highlight a bank in the Custom custom settings bank will be reset to default values settings bank menu and press A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press to restore default settings for the selected bank 4 407 T m button Custom Settings Bank The information display shows the current Custom Settings bank See Also Menu defaults are listed on page 407 If settings in the current bank have been modified from default values an asterisk will be displayed adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu a Autofocus a1 AF C Priority Selection MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When AF C 1 91 is selected for viewfinder photography this option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority or only when the camera is in focus focus priority Option Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release Release button is pressed Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in Release Or focus In continuous mode frame rate slows for focus S pataa improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast E Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator ERE Focus Ae is displayed Regardless of the option
224. inting and press to start printing E To cancel before all copies have been printed press 253 254 Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to create digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF M 433 1 Choose Select set for p DPOF print order M the DPOF print order i i item in the playback x Deselect all menu Press the MENU button and MENU narra select DPOF print order in the playback menu Highlight Select set and press to remove all photographs from the print order select Deselect all 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card to view images in other locations press and select the desired card and folder as Om 5 2 button described on page 221 To display je DPOF print order the current picture in full screen Be grome 014 0 eee a hold the amp qua To Pec Fem Fe select the current picture for printing press the O n 3 7 m er A T OK LON button and press A The picture will be marked with a amp icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the Om 4 7 button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press V when the number of prints is 1 Press when all the desired pictures have been selected 3 Se
225. ion Battery fully charged Cm Battery partially discharged me Low battery Charge battery or ready spare battery Ca cA Shutter release disabled Charge or blinks blinks exchange battery No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5b AC adapter 37 38 The control panel and viewfinder show the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings values over 1 000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred e g values between 1 400 and 1 499 are shown as 1 4K If two memory cards are inserted the displays show the space available on the card in the primary slot M 89 When the number of exposures remaining reaches the number will flash Foust amp or Fut will blink in the shutter speed displays and the icon for the affected card will blink Insert another memory card or delete some photos M 234 3 Check the number of exposures remaining Wi i ITN 71 Ready the Camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep your upper body stable When framing photographs in portrait tall orientation hold the camera as shown in the bottom of the three illustrations at right
226. ion Description Camera varies shutter speed Custom Setting e5 Flash speed set to AE only or shutter speed and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Camera varies shutter speed and aperture Custom Flash speed Setting e5 set to AE only or shutter speed aperture aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Camera varies aperture Custom Setting e5 set to Flash aperture AE only or aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Camera varies flash level only Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash BES Flashonly Flash bracketing is performed only with i TTL or AA flash control If a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot regardless of the setting selected for auto ISO sensitivity control 2 111 e7 Bracketing Order MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over IN exposure flash and white balance bracketing are performed in the order described on pages 134 and 138 If Under gt MTR gt over gt is selected shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing f1 amp Switch MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose what happens when the power switch is rotated to Option Description S LCD backlight 4 Co
227. ion about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer AVC Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO I ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD AVC VIDEO AND OR II DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L L C SEE http www mpegla com M Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional fla
228. ity control N 111 Off Multiple exposure M 195 2 Multiple exposure mode M 196 Off Number of shots M 197 2 Auto gain M 198 On Interval timer shooting 201 Reset 3 Time lapse photography M 207 Reset 4 Movie settings Q 70 Frame size frame rate CQ 70 1920 x 1080 30 fps Movie quality 1 70 High quality Microphone G1 70 Auto sensitivity Destination M 70 SD card slot 1 Default settings can be restored using Shooting menu bank 269 With the exception of Extended menu banks Multiple exposure Interval timer shooting and Time lapse photography only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset 2 Applies to all banks Shooting menu reset is not available while shooting is in progress 3 Applies to all banks Shooting ends when reset is performed 4 Applies to all banks Interval reset to 5 s recording time to 25 minutes EE Custom Settings Menu Defaults Option Default a1 AF C priority selection M 281 Release a2 AF S priority selection M 282 Focus a3 Focus tracking with lock on M 283 3 Normal a4 AF activation CO 283 Shutter AF ON a5 AF point illumination A 284 Auto a6 Focus point wrap around M 284 No wrap a7 Number of focus points M 285 51 points a8 Built in AF assist illuminator 1 286 On b1 ISO sensitivity step value M 287 1 3 step b2 EV steps f
229. ive An extremely e Replace the battery 7 ca exhausted or recharge the xix 19 blinks blinks rechargeable Li ion battery if the 21 387 battery or a third rechargeable Li ion party battery is battery is exhausted inserted either in the camera or in the optional MB D12 battery pack Camera clock is not set Set camera clock 27 blinks No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without specifying Aperture value will be AF maximum aperture displayed if maximum 212 Aperture shown in stops from maximum aperture aperture is specified Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution RA gt lt Camera unable to focus Change composition or 40 101 blinks using autofocus focus manually i Use a lower ISO 109 sensitivity e Use optional NDfilter 389 Subject too bright In exposure mode photo will be 5 Increase shutter 119 overexposed speed A Choose a smaller 120 Exposure l indicators and aperture arger shutter speed fnumber P Use a higher ISO 109 or aperture sensitivity display blink lt Use flash 181 380 n In exposure mode Subject too dark photo will be underexposed 5 Lower shutter 13 speed A Choose a larger 120 aperture smaller f number butb butbselectedin G eeiectmanual 119 122 blinks exposure mode 5 exposure mode buS3 h54 Images are being Wait until processing is blinks blinks processed complete
230. ivint ka RAW 11 TIFF e 10 FINE i E bast A EAYN Ug 1 Color temperature indicator 153 White balanCe sssssssssssssssssssesrss 145 Shutter speed eaacesssssssssssessssees 119 122 White balance fine tuning Exposure compensation value 130 INGICATOL ssssessenererrersessssessssessrssrerereen 151 Flash compensation value 188 Exposure indicator sseeseccscsseeees 123 White balance fine tuning 148 Exposure compensation Color temperature 0 146 White balance preset numberv Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence Number of shots in TNGICATOM 6 seeseessseecesseeeeesseee Bracketing progress indicator Exposure and flash bracketing 133 WB bracketing ADL bracketing PC connection indicator WB bracketing sequence 137 J HOR indicator ses HDR exposure differential 180 11 Multiple exposure indicator 196 Number of shots in multiple 2 SD card indicator ee a ee 127 3 CompactFlash card indicator 31 32 interval timer photography 204 Aperture f number 120 122 Focal length non CPU lenses 214 i leita aie i ae Flash indicator soceseseceececccceeeeeeee 299 MR OORT INcrement w Ea E A Number of shots in ADL bracketing Flexible program indicator seg ence 7 JH Exposure mode Image size Image quality Number of shots per interval
231. izes 84 87 How can get more pictures on the memory card Viewing Photographs m Q Playback How do I view photographs on the camera 219 How do I view more information about a photo 222 Can I view photos in an automatic slide show 267 Can I view photos on a TV 256 Can I protect photos from accidental deletion 233 Q Deletion How do I delete unwanted photos 234 Q and Settings E Connections How do I print photos Retouching Photographs m How do I create retouched copies of photos 341 How do I make JPEG copies of RAW NEF photos 353 Can I create a copy of a photo that looks like a 359 painting Can trim movie footage on the camera or save 74 movie stills m How do I use the menus 15 How do I keep the displays from turning off 291 292 How do I focus the viewfinder 35 How do set the camera clock 27 329 How do format memory cards 32 How do restore default settings 1l ore How do get help for a menu or message 18 m How do I copy photos to a computer 239 247 Can I print the date of recording on my photos 250 Maintenance and Optional Accessories oo E What lenses can I use 371 What optional flash units Speedlights can I use 380 What other accessories are available for my camera 387 389 What software is available for my camera How do I clean the camera 393 Where should I take my camera for servicing and 400 repairs
232. l 1 Release mode ial sssssccessee 103 D Accessory shoe Release mode dial for optional flash unit 380 lock release eeeccsssssccessesseeenseees 103 9 Accessory SHOE COVer eesssseseeeee 380 QUAL button p Power SWHECHisacnsasneasiinedencinie 26 Image quality eececsseesceseeees 84 11 Shutter release button 40 41 Image size wn 87 button Two button reset 193 Exposure compensation 130 BE Eyelet for camera strap ereeeeee xxi Two button reset 193 WB button 13 Movie record button 61 White balance 146 151 153 MODE amp button ISO button Exposure mode ISO sensitivity ee eeessseeceneeeeee 109 117 Auto ISO sensitivity control 111 Formatting memory cards 32 BKT button BEY Control pannel nsssssssnesnemenn 6 Bracketing 133 137 141 316 FT Focal plane mark svsessen 102 J Built in flash essen H Flash pop up button 4 4 button Flash MOC essssssssseessseseeeesseees 182 Flash compensation 00 188 Built in microphone 65 70 5 Flash sync terminal cover 380 Ten pin remote terminal 4 COVED sissceissseasessessenscaseyesseveave 215 390 Flash sync terminal cssssssessssen 380 8 Ten pin remote terminal 215 390 H Connector cover 243 248 256 Connector for external E MICTOPNONE sssscccssessseceseeseeeeneeeees 65 11 USB CONMECtOF ssccsseeesee
233. l also end automatically Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting Other Settings While a multiple exposure is being shot memory cards can not be formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be changed 200 Interval Timer Photography The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals 1 Select Interval timer SHOOTING MENU z gt HDR high dynamic range OFF shooting In the Vignette control 4 Auto distortion control shooting menu Long exposure NR 7 High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Press the MENU button to Maapin Kg Interval timer shooting OFF display the menus Highlight Interval timer shooting in the shooting menu and press gt MENU button 2 Choose a starting time Interval timer shooting a Choose start time Chose from the following starting triggers To start shooting immediately highlight Now and press Shooting begins about 3 s after settings are completed proceed to Step 3 To choose a starting time Interval timer shooting highlight Start time and ae press gt to display the start i A time options shown at right PT Press lt or gt to highlight 9 200i xt 0001 hours or minutes and press A or to change Press gt to continue 201 202 3 Choose the interval Interval timer shooting fal Olnterval Press lt or P to highlight m hours minutes or seconds Tor gt
234. l for Built in Flash Menu button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the flash mode for the built in flash Option Description TILS TTL Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions Choose the flash level The camera does not emit monitor pre flashes Repeating The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open M Manual Liia flash producing a strobe light effect Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling Commander ae CMD moda remote optional flash units in one or more groups OQ 303 BE Manual Choose a flash level between Full and 1 128 128 of full power At full power the built in flash has a Guide Number of 12 39 m ft ISO 100 20 C 68 F EE Repeating Flash The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is Flash ent for builtin flash open producing a strobe light effect Press lt Eau or gt to highlight the following options A or to change K Output Times Frequency 1 32 a 10 1017 1 128 1 4 2 15 1 50 MOK Option Description Output Choose flash output expressed as a fraction of full power Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected output Note that depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency the actual number of flashes may be less than selected Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second Times 301 302 Flash Control Mode The flash con
235. l out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire A Donot look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment A Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control When operating the viewfinder diopter adjustment control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally ZA Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking care to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection Do not disassemble Touching the product s internal parts could result in injury In the event of malfunction the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection xiii xiv A Donot use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire
236. lay and adjustment gt Show ISO Easy ISO M 295 Adjustments to either of these items reset the remaining item a message is displayed when the item is reset b5 Center Weig hted Area MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When calculating exposure center weighted b5 Center weishted area metering assigns the greatest weight to a circle in the center of the frame The C E diameter of this circle can be set to 8 12 tie 15 or 20 mm or to the average of the entire iia frame Note that unless Average is selected the diameter is fixed at 12 mm when a non CPU lens is used regardless of the setting selected for Non CPU lens data in the setup menu m 212 When Average is selected the average of the entire frame will be used for both CPU and non CPU lenses 289 b6 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Use this option to fine tune the exposure b6 Fine tune optimal exposure value selected by the camera Exposurecan ff be fine tuned separately foreach metering lMetrixmeterins o gt Center weighted metering 0 method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of 1 6 EV RETUO 0 vV Fine Tuning Exposure Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation 4 icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu E
237. le with ViewNxX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in other D800 cameras and compatible software and then deleted when no longer needed if two memory cards are inserted the card in the primary slot will be used M 89 To copy custom Picture Manage Picture Control Controls to or from the memory card or to delete Delete Load save custom Picture Controls from the memory card highlight Load Save in the Manage Picture Control menu and press The following options will be displayed Copy to camera Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card to custom Picture Controls C 1 through C 9 on the camera and name them as desired Delete from card Delete 5 selected custom Picture Controls from the memory card The confirmation dialog shown at right will be displayed before a Picture button Control is deleted to delete the selected Picture Control highlight Yes and press Copy to card Copy a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 from the camera to a selected destination 1 through 99 on the memory card Delete Picture Control VIVID 02 O UN PN Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory card can only be used to store user
238. lect image Bia E 100ND800 LRE ka Ea pS Zoom OK Playback slot and folder CF card slot IMENUT E Te 5 Copy white balance Press to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment M 333 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset button Choosing a White Balance Preset Press A to highlight the current white balance preset d 1 d 4 and press gt to select another preset Fine Tuning Preset White Balance The selected preset can be fine tuned by selecting Fine tune and adjusting white balance as described on page 149 White balance Preset manual Fine tune Edit comment Select image Protect Chile 159 160 Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset 1 Select PRE Preset manual White balance K Choose color temp PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu M 158 and press gt 2 Selecta preset Highlight the desired preset and press the center of the multi selector Selet MOK 3 Select Edit comment White balance fal Preset manual Highlight Edit comment and Ft Edit comment press gt Select image Protect d 1 4 Edit the comment White balance 0123456789MBCDE j j FGHIJKLMNOPQRST Edit
239. lect imprint options DPOF print order Select set Highlight the following options and i i Done CG press gt to toggle the highlighted Pit ota ae option on or off to complete the print E Print date order without including this information proceed to Step 4 Print shooting data Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order Print date Print date of recording on all pictures in print order 4 Complete the print order 5 DPOF print order Select set Print shooting data Print date Highlight Done and press to complete the print order button Print Set To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictures to modify and print the current order M 251 DPOF date and shooting data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order use the PictBridge Time stamp option The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW 84 can not be selected for printing using this option Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created
240. lens is attached automatically selects non TTL auto A 7 Notes on Optional Flash Units Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions If the unit supports CLS refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D800 is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400 At values over 6400 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed View the photograph in the monitor if it is underexposed adjust aperture ISO sensitivity or the distance to the subject and try again When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure The SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction while the SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination with the following restrictions
241. less of the option selected for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl Q 287 Choose non Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to Non CPU CPU lens choose a lens number specified using the Non CPU number lens data option 212 Active Press the Fn button and rotate the command dials D Lighting to adjust Active D Lighting Q 174 None No operation is performed when the command dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed 314 f5 Assign Preview Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the depth of field preview button either by itself Preview button press or when used in combination with the command dials Preview command dials The options available are the same as for Assign Fn button 2 311 except that AF ON is not available for Assign preview button The default options for Preview button press and Preview command dials are Preview and None respectively f6 Assign AE L AF L button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the AE L AF L button either by itself AE L AF L button press or when used in combination with the command dials AE L AF L command dials The options available are the same as for Assign Fn button V 311 except that 1 stp spd aperture and Active D Lighting are not available The default options for AE L AF L button press and AE L AF L command dials are AE AF lock and None respectively
242. ll other flash units are lit frame the photograph focus and shoot FV lock 2 190 can be used if desired 305 306 The Flash Sync Mode Display 4 does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when is selected for Built in flash gt Mode Flash Compensation The flash compensation value selected with the 9 HA button and sub command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the built in flash group A and group B in the Commander mode menu A Ei icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built in flash gt TTL The Ei icon flashes when the built in flash is in mode M 1 commander Mode Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light from the built in flash particular care is required if the camera is not mounted on a tripod Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens in TTL mode or the photocells on the remote flash units AA mode as this may interfere with exposure To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures large f numbers or use an optional SG 3IR infrared panel for the built in flash An SG 3IR is required for best results with rear curtain sync which produces brighter timing flashes After positioning the r
243. lock icon Em is no longer displayed in the viewfinder 191 192 Using FV Lock with the Built in Flash FV lock is only available with the built in flash when TTL is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash A 301 Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units FV lock is also available with optional flash units in TTL and where supported monitor pre flash AA and monitor pre flash A flash control modes Note that when commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash 301 you will need to set the flash control mode for the master or at least one remote group to TTL or AA Metering The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as follows Flash unit Flash mode Metered area i TTL 6 mm circle in center of frame Stand alone flash unit AA Area metered by flash exposure meter i TTL Entire frame Used with other flash AA units Advanced Area metered by flash exposure ara A master Wireless Light ireless Lighting flash meter See Also For information on using the depth of field preview button or t AE L AF L button for FV lock see Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button m 315 or Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button M 315 Other Shooting Options Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the QUAL and 4 buttons do
244. loudy shade preset manual up to 4 values can be stored choose color temperature 2500 K 10000 K all with fine tuning Live view Modes Live view photography still images movie live view movies Lens servo Autofocus AF Single servo AF AF S full time servo AF AF F Manual focus M AF area mode Face priority AF wide area AF normal area AF subject tracking AF Autofocus Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame camera selects focus point automatically when face priority AF or subject tracking AF is selected Movie Metering TTL exposure metering using main image sensor Frame size pixels and 1 920 x 1 080 30 p progressive 25 p 24 p frame rate 1 280 x 720 60 p 50 p 30 p 25 p Actual frame rates for 60 p 50 p 30 p 25 p and 24 pare 59 94 50 29 97 25 and 23 976 fps respectively options support both xhigh and normal image quality File format MOV Video compression H 264 MPEG 4 Advanced Video Coding Audio recording format Linear PCM Audio recording device Built in monaural or external stereo microphone sensitivity adjustable Other options Index marking time lapse photography Monitor Monitor 8 cm 3 2 in approx 921k dot VGA TFT LCD with 170 viewing angle approx 100 frame coverage and automatic monitor brightness control using ambient brightness sensor Playback Playback Full fram
245. lowing the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading to be recorded with each photograph taken The camera can be used with an optional GP 1 GPS unit see below note that the GP 1 does not provide the compass heading or with third party units connected via an optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord 1 216 BE The GP 1 GPS Unit The GP 1 is an optional GPS unit designed for use with Nikon digital cameras For information on connecting the unit see the manual provided with the GP 1 215 216 EE Other GPS Units Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2 01 or 3 01 of the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format can be connected to the camera s ten pin remote terminal using an MC 35 GPS adapter cord available separately 1 390 Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector These devices connect to the MC 35 using a cable with a D sub 9 pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device See the MC 35 instruction manual for details Before turning the camera on set the GPS device to NMEA mode 4800 baud see the documentation provided with the GPS device for more information The amp Icon Connection status is shown by the amp icon static Camera has established communication with a GPS device Photo information for pictures taken while this icon is di
246. ly anda icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel after you release the Al button The current value for exposure Bo A ee E eel compensation can be confirmed in the exposure indicator by pressing the button kk Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off Exposure Mode Ii In exposure mode M exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator shutter speed and aperture do not change Using a Flash When a flash is used exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash level See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Setting b3 Exp flash comp step value 287 For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the 4 button see Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation M 288 For information on automatically varying exposure flash level white balance or Active D Lighting see page 132 131 Bracketing Bracketing automatically varies exposure flash level Active D Lighting ADL or white balance slightly with each shot bracketing the current value Choose in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure flash level i TTL and where supported auto aperture flash control modes only see pages 185 301 and 382 Active D Lighting or whit
247. m the batteries in the battery pack are used first when an optional MB D12 battery pack is BI Use MB D12 batteries fist Co attached Note that if the MB D12 is powered Use camera battery first by an optional EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector the AC adapter will be used regardless of the option selected A icon is displayed in the camera control panel when the batteries in the MB D12 are in use The MB D12 Battery Pack The MB D12 takes one EN EL15 or EN EL18 rechargeable Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline Ni MH or lithium batteries an EN EL15 is supplied with the camera EN EL18 and AA batteries are available separately The information display shows the type of battery inserted in the MB D12 as follows ENA oN mi GSA OMFG BT amp A DO MB D12 battery type display Battery type EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery EN EL18 rechargeable Li ion battery FRE AA AA batteries 298 e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Sync Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls flash sync speed Option Description Auto FP high speed sync is used when a compatible flash unit is attached 382 If the built in flash or other flash 1 320s units are used shutter speed is set to 1 320 s When the Auto FP camera shows a shutter speed of 1 320 s in exposure mode F or A auto FP high speed sync will be
248. mage Overlay MENU button gt gf retouch menu Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals the results which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor are noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings before creating an overlay set image quality and size 84 87 all options are available To create a NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay Image overlay Image1 Image2 Preview Highlight Image overlay and press The dialog shown at right will be displayed with Image 1 highlighted press to display a picture selection dialog listing only NEF RAW images created with this camera 350 2 Select the first image Image overlay Image 1 ra E 100ND800 Use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph oO is a in the overlay To view the cai a i highlighted photograph full Voom MOK frame press and hold the amp button To view images in other locations press S and select the desired card and folder as described on page 221 Press to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display 3 Select the second image The selected image will appear as Image 1 Highlight Image 2 and press then select the second photo as described in Step 2
249. mage quality a i oO JPEG i A confirmation dialog he will be displayed O 4Assign Fn button button 4 Delete the selected items Press to delete the selected T Delete selected item Yes items ou Cancel X Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the ra button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press f again to remove the selected item from My Menu 368 EHE Reordering Options in My Menu 1 Select Rank items In My Menu 1 highlight Rank items and press gt 2 Select an item Highlight the item you wish to move and press button Rank items Image quality NORM JPEG compression Eis Type ONE t4 Assign Fn button Select items 3 Position the item Press A or W to move the item up or down in My Menu and press Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items Rank items Image quality JPEG compression Type 14 Assign Fn button Move MOK 4 Exitto My Menu Press the MENU button to return to My Menu la MENU button 369 370 Recent Settings To display the twenty most recently used settings select Recent settings for My Menu gt Choose tab 1 Select Choose tab MY MENU Image quality In My Menu 4 highlight 7 tt Choose tab and press gt t4 Assign Fn button
250. manual exposure modes Shutter speed and aperture lock are not available in programmed auto exposure mode 1 Assign shutter speed and aperture lock to a camera control Select Shutter spd amp aperture lock as the button command dials option in the Custom Settings menu M 314 Shutter speed and aperture lock can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f4 Assign Fn button M 311 the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button 315 or the t AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button 2 315 2 Lock shutter speed and or aperture Shutter speed exposure modes 5 and M Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until Ml icons appear in the viewfinder and control panel a K Fn button Main command dial To unlock shutter speed press the button and rotate the main command dial until the Ml icons disappear from the displays Aperture exposure modes F and M Press the selected button and rotate the sub command dial until If icons appear in the viewfinder and the control panel r l Fn button Sub command dial To unlock aperture press the button and rotate the sub command dial until the I icons disappear from the displays See Also Use Custom Setting f7 Shutter spd amp aperture lock N 316 to
251. mera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a silent time lapse movie using the options currently selected for Movie settings in the shooting menu 1 70 Before Shooting Before beginning time lapse photography take a test shot at current settings framing the photo in the viewfinder for an accurate exposure preview and view the results in the monitor To record changes in brightness choose manual exposure M 122 for consistent coloration choose a white balance setting other than auto M 145 We recommend that you briefly switch to movie live view and check the current image area crop in the monitor M 59 note however that time lapse photography is not available in live view Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted use an optional EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector or a fully charged EN EL15 battery 1 Select Time lapse SHOOTING MENU photography in the shooting menu A al 4 ji Ci E Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Time lapse photography in the shooting menu and press b gt M MENU button Time lapse photography OFF Movie settings 3s 207 208 2 Press gt Press to proceed to Step 3 and choose an interval and shooting time To record a time lapse movie using the default interval of 5 seconds and shooting time of 25 minu
252. movie eleanor Choose from values between 1 and 7 note that higher values may include hues from other colors The effect can be previewed in the edit display 6 Select additional colors To select additional colors rotate the main command dial to highlight another of the three color boxes at the top of Reset Adjust Save the display and repeat Steps 3 5 to select another color Repeat for a third color if desired To deselect the highlighted color press t or press and hold t to remove all colors 7 Save the edited copy yy Press to copy the photograph E 69 100ND800 a JPG 5 button _ 363 Side by Side Comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs This option is only available if the button is pressed to display the retouch menu when a copy or original is played back full frame 3 i 1 Selecta picture Select a retouched copy shown by a icon ora photograph that has been retouched in full frame connie ae ao NORMAL 7360x4912 playback and press button 2 Select Side by side iui comparison R Color sath a Perspective control Highlight Side by side ae comparison and press Cancel 364 3 Compare the copy with the Options used to original The source image is displayed on the left the retouched copy on the right with the options A used to create the copy listed cor
253. movie edit options Press to display movie edit options Edit movie R Save selected frame Cancel button 3 Choose Save selected frame t movie N Choose start end point 7 a R Save selected frame 0k Highlight Save selected EF frame and press 4 Create a still copy M woesoe 100s Press A to create a still copy of the current frame 77 78 5 save the copy Highlight Yes and press to create a fine quality eu 84 JPEG copy of the lt lt selected frame Movie stills are indicated by a icon in full frame playback Save Selected Frame JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo information 222 EE Image Recording Options Image Area Choose the aspect ratio and angle of view image area Thanks to the camera s FX format 35 9 x 24 mm image sensor you can choose from angles of view as wide as those supported by 35 mm 135 format film cameras while automatically cropping pictures to the DX angle of view when using DX format lenses See page 437 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored at different image area settings EH Auto DX Crop Choose whether to automatically select a DX Image area crop when a DX lens is attached la Auto DX crop Choose image area Option Descripti
254. mpensation MENU button Custom Settings menu This option controls whether the amp button is needed to set exposure compensation MA 130 If On Auto reset or On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description On Auto reset Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials see note below The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off exposure compensation settings selected using the i button are not reset On As above except that the exposure compensation value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off Off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the 4 button and rotating the main command dial Change Main Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when On Auto reset or On is selected for Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f9 Customize command dials gt Change main sub 2 317 Customize command dials gt Change main sub Off On at P Sub command dial Sub command dial 3 3 5 Sub command dial Main command dial gt A Main command dial Sub command dial m N A 288 Show ISO Easy ISO Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation can not be used with Custom Setting d7 ISO disp
255. n at the specified starting time or after about 3 s if Now was selected for Choose start time in Step 2 Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken Note that because shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot the interval between a shot being recorded and the start oP gt 10 05 00 01 00 003 x 2 0006 of the next shot may vary If shooting can not proceed at current settings for example if a shutter speed of tsi by is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute a warning will be displayed in the monitor Cover the Viewfinder To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter Q 106 M out of Memory If the memory card is full the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken Resume shooting M 205 after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card Interval Timer Photography Interval timer photography can not be combined with long time exposures bulb photography 124 or time lapse photography 207 and is not available when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 Assign shutter button M 324 203 204 Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography If exposure flas
256. n not be changed Image quality set to NEF RAW 2 84 Camera is slow to record photos Turn long exposure noise reduction off 277 AF assist illuminator does not light AF assist lamp does not light if AF C is selected for autofocus mode QZ 91 Choose AF S If an option other than auto area AF is selected for AF area mode select center focus point M 96 The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded Off selected for Custom Setting a8 Built in AF assist illuminator 286 Illuminator has turned off automatically Illuminator may become hot with continued use wait for lamp to cool down Flicker or banding appear during live view or movie recording Choose an option for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply 329 Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording A flash or other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie recording Noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels fog lines or reddish areas appears in photos To reduce randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines choose lower ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction 109 277 To reduce bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog at shutter speeds slower than 1 s or to reduce reddish areas and other artifacts in long time exposures enable long exposure noise reduction M 277 Turn Active D Lighting off to avoid heightening the
257. n selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots N 291 the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Interval between shots In other modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture programmed auto aperture shutter priority auto or shutter speed aperture priority auto manual exposure mode If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt Auto ISO sensitivity control Q 111 in modes F 5 and A the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded Custom Setting e6 Auto bracketing mode M M 308 can be used to change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed and or aperture or by varying flash level alone White Balance Bracketing The camera creates multiple co
258. n the control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A Rotating the sub command dial to the right increases the amount of blue B At settings other than 0 an asterisk X appears in the control panel TE A WB button Sub command dial Control panel 151 152 Choosing a Color Temperature When I Choose color temp is selected for white balance color temperature can be selected using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by using the WB button multi selector and sub command dial The White Balance Menu Enter values for the amber blue and green magenta axes M 149 1 Select Choose color ES White balance a temp PRE Preset manual Press the MENU button and select White balance in the shooting menu Ra Highlight Choose color CON temp and press P 2 Select a value for amber White balance blue Press lt or P to highlight digits OG and press A or W to change 2500 10000 Value for amber A blue B axis Select a value for green magenta Press lt or P to highlight the G green or M magenta axis and press A or to select a value Value for green G magenta M axis 4 Press ae Press to save changes and return to the shooting menu If a value other than 0 is selected for the green G magenta M axis an asterisk X
259. n using a flash 1 Highlight the monitor hue ra indicator Press and hold amp and press lt or gt to highlight the monitor hue indicator t the left side of the display at the left side of the display aE button 2 Adjust monitor hue Keeping the amp amp button pressed rotate E5 the main command dial to adjust monitor hue select to preview the hue of the final photograph in the monitor if another option is selected the hue seen in the monitor during live view photography will differ from that seen in the final image Monitor hue is reset when the camera is turned off Recalling Monitor Hue To restore the most recently selected hue when starting live view hold the WB button while pressing Choosing a Picture Control Pressing O n amp during live view displays a list of Picture Controls Highlight the desired Picture Control and press gt to adjust Picture Control settings JI ZO 163 Sancel Gadist Om F2 button Adjusting Monitor Brightness Monitor brightness can be adjusted as described below Note that brightness adjustment is not available during exposure preview 1 Highlight the monitor brightness indicator Press and hold 9 and press lt or gt to highlight the monitor brightness indicator at the right side of the display 2 Adjust monitor brightness D S i Keeping the 9 button pressed pres
260. nce priority manual 25 3s GN GN GN FP aR aR Manual M M FP F 23 Repeating flash RPT Advanced wireless 23 a lighting CHD CMD M Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon flash units Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D800 Rechargeable Li ion Battery EN EL15 C1 19 21 Additional EN EL15 batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives These batteries can be recharged using an MH 25 battery charger Battery Charger MH 25 M 19 The MH 25 can be used to recharge EN EL15 batteries Multi Power Battery Pack MB D12 The MB D12 is equipped with a shutter release button AF ON button multi selector and main and sub command dials for improved operation when taking photographs in portrait tall orientation When attaching the MB D12 remove the Powersources camera MB D12 contact cover A BL 5 battery chamber cover and an MH 26 battery charger are required when using EN EL18 batteries Power Connector EP 5B AC Adapter EH 5b These accessories can be used to power the camera for extended periods EH 5a
261. nd Apertures Available with the Built in Flash 1 184 The effects of the flash can be previewed by pressing the depth of field preview button to emit a modeling flash 4 307 5 Take the picture Compose the photograph focus and shoot Lowering the Built in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place Flash Modes The D800 supports the following flash modes Flash mode Description a Front curtain This mode is recommended for most situations In programmed auto and aperture priority auto modes shutter speed will automatically be set to values between 1 250 and 1 60 s 1 8 000 to 1 60 s when an optional sync flash unit is used with Auto FP High Speed Sync M 299 Red eye reduction lamp lights for approximately one second before main flash Pupils in subject s eyes LO contract reducing red eye effect sometimes caused by flash Owing to one second shutter release delay this Red eye mode is not recommended with moving subjects or in reduction Other situations in which quick shutter response is required Avoid moving camera while red eye reduction lamp is lit Combines red eye reduction with slow sync Use for S portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery Available only in programmed auto and aperture Red eye priority auto exposure modes Use of a tripod is reduction with ecomm
262. ng indicator At settings other than zero a Hai icon and exposure and flash bracketing es sse o gal tl indicators will appear in the control panel and BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder 133 134 3 Select an exposure increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose the exposure increment ABN BKT button Sub command dial Exposure increment Control panel At default settings the size of the increment can be chosen from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV The bracketing programs with an increment of 3 EV are listed below Control panel display No of shots Bracketing order EVs OF O3 9 0 JF nx 3 0 0 3 0 7 a ar Da 3 0 0 7 0 3 er ny 2 0 0 3 er nx 2 0 0 3 JF Dx 3 0 0 3 0 3 Z E hik 5 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 0 1 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 JEM F soena iia iF a3 nifi 7 0 7 1 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 7 0 3 p ee A GF 3 ifii 3 0 3 0 7 1 0 1 3 See Also For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl Q 287 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Custom Setting e7 Bracketing order N 308 For information on choosing the role of the BKT button see Custom Setting f8 Assign BKT button M 316 4 Framea photograph focus and
263. ng menu 84 Remote Cords If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 Assign shutter button 2 324 the shutter release buttons on optional remote cords CO 390 can be used to start movie live view and to start and end movie recording m Recording Movies Flicker banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame flicker and banding can be reduced using Flicker reduction 0 329 Bright light sources may leave after images when the camera is panned Jagged edges false colors moir and bright spots may also appear Bright bands may appear at the top or bottom of the frame if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright momentary light source When recording movies avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Flash lighting can not be used during movie live view Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits exit live view when the camera is not in use Note that the temperature of the camera s internal circuits may rise and noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may be displayed in the following instan
264. ng you to choose a program select Nikon Transfer 2 Windows 7 If the following dialog is displayed select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below 1 Under Import pictures and videos click Change program A program selection dialog will be displayed select Import file using Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK 2 Double click Import file 6 Click Start Transfer At default settings all the pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer for more information on using Nikon Transfer 2 start ViewNX 2 or Nikon Transfer 2 and select ViewNX 2 Help from the Help menu Start Transfer 7 Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer ends Nikon Transfer 2 will close automatically when transfer is complete vV During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress Ethernet and Wireless Networks If the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter V 387 is attached photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 available separately The WT 4 can be used in any of the following modes Mode Function Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp server Transfer mode Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before select mode upload Control camera from computer us
265. ning images No images can be played back until All images are All photos in another folder has iaee current folder are beenselectedorHide 260 hidden image used to allow at least one image to be displayed Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution RA File has been created or k modified usinga _ Cannot display File can not be played this file F computer or back on camera a different make of camera or file is corrupt Selected image Images created with Cannot select this file cannot be other devices can not 342 retouched be retouched Check printer To Check printer Printer error TESUME a ct 248 Continue if available Paper in printer is Insert paper of correct Check paper notofselected size and select 248 size Continue Paperjam Paper is jammed Clear jam and select 248 in printer Continue i Insert paper of Out of paper 22 NPAT SOURCE selected size and 248 paper select Continue Checkink To resume Check ink supply Ink error select Continue 248 Out of ink __ Printerisoutof Replace inkand select 248 ink Continue See printer manual for more information Specifications EE Nikon D800 D800E Digital Camera Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective pixels Effectiv
266. not are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management Notices for Customers in the U S A Power Cable At voltages over AC 125 V U S A only The power cable must be rated for the voltage in use be at least AWG no 18 gauge and have SVG insulation or better with a NEMA 6P 15 plug rated for AC 250 V 15 A Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
267. nother person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual M 158 Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money coins securities government bonds or local government bonds even if such copies or reproductions are stamped Sample The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited e Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies shares bills checks gift certificates etc commuter passes
268. ns Image review Press to display options for the selected menu item 7 Highlight an option 5 Image review Press A or to highlight an option 17 18 8 select the highlighted item Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection press the MENU button Nikon re button Note the following points Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing gt or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway CD 41 Help If a icon is displayed at the bottom left 5 SHOOTING MENU lt HDR high dynamic range corner of the monitor help can be displayed Vianette control by pressing the Om amp 3 button A E High ISO NR E ISO sensitivity settings Multiple exposure Interval timer shooting Multiple exposure A description of the currently selected option or menu will be displayed while the button is pressed Press A or W to scroll through the display Record the specified number of shots as a single image Om F button First Steps Charge the Battery The camera is powered by an EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery supplied To maximize shooting time charge the battery in the supplied MH 2
269. ntrol panel backlight illuminates for 6 s Dm amp and information Control panel backlight illuminates and Seer display shooting information is displayed in monitor f2 Multi Selector Center Button MEW button gt Custom Settings menu This option determines the role assigned to the center of the multi selector during viewfinder photography playback and live view regardless of the option selected pressing the center of the multi selector when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie playback BE Shooting Mode Option Role assigned to center of multi selector RESET Select center focus point Select center focus point 3 Highlight active focus point Highlight the active focus point Not used None 309 HE Playback Mode Option Role assigned to center of multi selector E Thumbnail on off Toggle between full frame and thumbnail playback Lal View histograms In both full frame and thumbnail playback a histogram is displayed while the center of the multi selector is pressed Q Zoom on off Toggle between full frame or thumbnail playback and playback zoom Choose the initial zoom setting from Low magnification Medium magnification and High magnification The zoom display will center on the active focus point Choose slot and Display the slot and folder selection dialog 2 221 folder HE Live View Option Role assigned to center of multi sele
270. o For information on choosing a language and setting the time and date see page 26 See page 35 for information on adjusting viewfinder focus 6 Select autofocus 491 Rotate the focus mode selector to AF autofocus 7 Focus and shoot 40 41 Press the shutter release button halfway to focus then press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph 8 vViewthe photograph CO 43 gt button Introduction Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera Memory cards are sold separately BF 1B body BM 12 cap I 24 monitor nd 389 cover 14 e BS 1 accessory shoe cover 4 380 D800 D800E digital camera M 2 EN EL15 MH 25 battery charger rechargeable AC wall adapter Li ion supplied only in battery with countries or regions terminal where required Shape cover of power cable depends 19 21 on country of sale M 19 UC E14 USB cable USB cable clip 243 248 243 Strap AN DC6 for D800 e Quick Guide AN DC6E for D800E M xxi e ViewNX 2 installer CD 239 e Warranty e User s Manual this guide Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manua
271. ode shooting speed 293 Clean image sensor Clock battery ssssssssssssssssesssssssssseesssssssse Cloudy White balance CLS Color balance Color outline 359 Color sketch w 274 Color space Color temperature 146 147 152 Commander MOe ssesseeseeee 301 303 CompactFlash Compatible lenses Compressed Type Computer Continuous high speed Continuous low speed Continuous release mode Continuous servo AF Contrast Control panel a Coordinated Universal Time 217 Copy image s ssssssssssssssssssssssssessessssssse Copyright information CPU contacts CPU lens Creative Lighting System Cropping PictBridge Setup menu 250 CTOSS SCION sssssssccssssccsssessseeceeseesenseess Custom setting bank Custom Settings Customize command dials Cyanotype Monochrome D Date and time Date format Daylight saving time we 27 329 274 433 193 405 Delete all images Delete current image Deleting selected photograph 236 Depth of field ssssssssssssssssssss10 117 120 Depth of field preview button 63 117 315 322 Destination Movie settings 70 Digital Print Order Format DPOF 251 254 433 DIO Pte l scasstsssssssssissdicsnrsdnasesrtinncaecsss 35 388 Direct sunlight White balance 145 Distortion CONTHOL ccssescsssecssseessees 358
272. on Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is On attached If another lens is attached the crop selected for Choose image area will be used Off Crop selected for Choose image area is used 79 Choose Image Area Choose the image area used when a non DX lens is attached ora DX lens is attached with g Off selected for Auto DX crop 82 Image area Auto DX crop Choose image area Option Description FX 36x24 Images are recorded in FX format using the full area 1 0x of the image sensor 35 9 x 24 0 mm producing an E FX formati angle of view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a 35mm format camera A 30 0 x 19 9 mm area at the center of the image 1 2x 30x20 sensor is used to record photographs To calculate 1 2x the approximate focal length of the lens in 35mm format multiply by 1 2 An area at the center of the image sensor DX 24x16 23 4 x 15 6 mm is used to record pictures in DX 1 5x p T DX formati format To calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in 35mm format multiply by 1 5 5 4 30x24 Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 4 30 0 x 24 0 mm FX format 80 g Ee DX format 24x 16 ice image circle Tse EX format 36x24 image circle Image Area The selected option is shown in the information display sRGB A Omm0F G5 BKT a aa oS DX Lenses DX lenses are designed for use wi
273. on Description The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned on Clean at The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown shutdown each time the camera is turned off on Cleanatstartup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup amp shutdown and at shutdown Cleaning off Automatic image sensor cleaning off ON Clean at startup OFF 1 Select Clean at startup Clean image sensor shutdown E Clean now Display the Clean image sensor menu as described in Step 2 on the previous page Highlight Clean at startup shutdown and press P Clean at startup shutdown _ 8 gt 2 Select an option Clean image sensor Clean at startup shutdown Highlight an option and fy OON clean at startu F Clean at shutdown press 8 3 Clean at startup amp shutdown Cleaning off button m Image Sensor Cleaning Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning Image sensor cleaning may not be performed at startup if the flash is charging Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low pass filter If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu clean the image sensor manually see below or consult a Nikon authorized service representative If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera
274. on images recorded with the device Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it unattended Batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat e Keep the battery terminals clean e Turn the product off before replacing the battery Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal cover These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that it will no longer function If the battery will not be used for some time insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the camera for storage The battery should be stored in a cool location with an ambient temperature of 15 to 25 C 59 to 77 F avoid hot or extremely cold locations Repeat this process at least once every six mon
275. or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy Cancel_ Zoom OSave 359 Perspective Control MENU button gt p retouch menu Create copies that reduce the effects of Perspective control perspective taken from the base of a tall object Use the multi selector to adjust perspective note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out The results can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy Before After 360 Miniature Effect MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama Works best with photos taken from a high vantage point To Press Description Choose qE Press 9 to choose orientation of area that is in orientation focus If photo is displayed in wide CAN orientation press A or VW to vel position frame showing area of copy that will be in focus Choose position If photo is displayed in tall orientation 331 press lt or P to position frame showing area of copy that will be in focus Cancel iConfirm Save If area of effect is in wide orientation press lt or gt to choose height Choose size If area of effect is in tall orientation press A or W to choose width Pie Q Preview copy copy Cancel Exit to full frame playback without creating co
276. or Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed 11 299 3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity Consult table of flash ranges M 187 when setting aperture in A and M modes Flash Control Mode The camera supports the following i TTL flash control modes i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Flash emits series of nearly invisible preflashes monitor preflashes immediately before main flash Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by RGB sensor with approximately 91K 91 000 pixels and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambient background lighting If type G or D lens is used distance information is included when calculating flash output Precision of calculation can be increased for non CPU lenses by providing lens data focal length and maximum aperture see M 212 Not available when spot metering is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level brightness of background is not taken into account Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected The flash control mode for the built in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e3 Flash
277. or exposure cntrl Q 287 1 3 step b3 Exp flash comp step value 1 287 1 3 step b4 Easy exposure compensation M 288 Off b5 Center weighted area 1 289 12mm b6 Fine tune optimal exposure M 290 Matrix metering 0 Center weighted metering 0 Spot metering 0 c1 Shutter release button AE L M 290 Off c2 Auto meter off delay 1 291 6s c3 Self timer M 291 Self timer delay 10s Number of shots 1 Interval between shots 0 5s c4 Monitor off delay 1 292 Playback 10s Menus 1 min Information display 10s Image review 4s Live view 10 min Option Default d1 Beep 2 292 Volume Off Pitch High d2 CL mode shooting speed M 293 2 fps d3 Max continuous release M 293 100 d4 Exposure delay mode M 293 Off d5 File number sequence M 294 On d6 Viewfinder grid display M 295 Off d7 ISO display and adjustment M 295 Show frame count d8 Screen tips M 295 On d9 Information display A 296 Auto d10 LCD illumination A 296 Off d11 MB D12 battery type H 297 LR6 AA alkaline d12 Battery order 1 298 Use MB D12 batteries first e1 Flash sync speed 299 1 250 s e2 Flash shutter speed M 300 1 60 s e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash Optional TTL flash 301 302 e4 Modeling flash Q 307 On e5 Auto bracketing set M 307 AE amp flash e6 Auto bracketing Mode M 1 308 Flash speed e7 Bracketing order M
278. or the photo information display A Y appears next to selected items to deselect highlight and press gt To return to the playback menu highlight Done and press 9 261 262 Copy Image s MENU button gt E playback menu Copy pictures from one memory card to another Option Description Select source Choose card from which pictures will be copied Select image s Select pictures to be copied Select destination Select destination folder on remaining card folder Copy image s Copy selected pictures to specified destination 1 Choose Select source 5 Copy image s Highlight Select source and Select source press gt Select image s 2 Select the source card im COP imaget Select source Highlight the slot for the card containing the images to be copied and press C fardsot id 3 Choose Select image s 5 Copy image s o Highlight Select image s an press gt Select image s 4 select the source folder TT Select image s Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and press gt 5 Make the initial selection z _C0Py image s Images selected by default Before going on select or deselect individual images you Select all images can mark all or all protected Select protected images images in the folder for copying by choosing Select all images or Select protected images To mark only individually selected images for
279. ot 7 In continuous high speed and continuous low gN speed release modes M 103 the camera records all exposures in a single burst If On series is selected the camera will continue to record multiple exposures while the shutter release button is pressed if On single photo is selected multiple exposure shooting will end after the first photograph In self timer mode the camera will automatically record the number of exposures selected in Step 3 on page 197 regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots M 291 the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Interval between shots In other release modes one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 199 The icon will blink until shooting ends PS If On series is selected multiple i re exposure shooting will only end when ae gt AM AALY Off is selected for multiple exposure N i mode if On single photo is selected multiple exposure shooting ends automatically when the multiple exposure is complete The icon clears from the display when multiple exposure shooting ends EE Interrupting Multiple Exposures To interrupt a multiple exposure before the Multiple exposure specified
280. ovies PowerPC G4 1 GHz or better G5 Intel Core or Xeon series H 264 movies playback PowerPC G5 Dual or Core Duo 2 GHz or better Intel Core i5 or better recommended when viewing movies with a frame size of 1 280 x 720 or more at a frame rate of 30 fps or above or movies with a frame size of 1 920 x 1 080 or more H 264 movies editing 2 6 GHz or better Core 2 Duo GPU that supports QuickTime H 264 hardware acceleration recommended os Mac OS X version 10 5 8 10 6 8 or 10 7 2 RAM 512 MB or more 2 GB or more recommended Hard disk space A minimum of 500 MB available on the startup disk 1 GB or more recommended Monitor Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels XGA or more 1280 x 1024 pixels SXGA or more recommended e Color 24 bit color millions of colors or more Direct USB Connection Connect the camera using the supplied UC E14 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Turnthe computer on Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up 3 Connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown 1 USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 1 The USB Cable Clip To prevent cable from being disconnected attach the clip as shown a 4 Turn the camera on 243 244 5 start Nikon Transfer 2 If a message is displayed prompti
281. p 1 292 107 p 108 Mirror up Mode Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised Use of a tripod is recommended T1 Select mirror up mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Mup p gt EDY Release mode dial 2 Raise the mirror Frame the picture focus and then press ZN the shutter release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror M Mirror Up While the mirror is raised photos can not be framed in the viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed 3 Takea picture y Press the shutter release button all the EN way down again to take a picture To prevent blurring caused by camera movement press the shutter release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord M 390 The mirror lowers when shooting ends Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised E ISO Sensitivity Manual Adjustment ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed Choose from settings that range from ISO 100 to ISO 6400 in steps equivalent to 1 3 EV Settings of from about 0 3 to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0 3 to 2 EV above ISO 6400 are also available for special situations The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make
282. pies of each photograph each with a different white balance For more information on white balance see page 145 1 Select white balance bracketing Auto bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom 17 AEE Eaa Setting e5 Auto bracketing set Flash only WB WB bracketing ok Si ADL bracketing 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel Number of shots Se BKT button Main command Control panel B dial WB bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a icon and WB bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel and BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder 137 138 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose the white balance adjustment Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired BKT button Sub command dial White balance increment Control panel Choose from increments of 1 5 mired 2 10 mired or 3 15 mired Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue higher A values to increased amounts of amber 149 The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below No of White balance Control panel
283. pressed E button 14 fo RAW 4 FINE I RAW Exposure mode 2 Flexible program indicator E Flash sync indicator 1 Shutter speed Exposure compensation value Flash compensation value White balance fine tuning Color temperature cec0ee Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence 133 Number of shots in WB bracketing SEQUENCE siisii issis 137 Number of shots in multiple EXPOSU Essien 197 Focal length non CPU lenses 214 Color temperature indicator s sassosasasdanssatesssansssnssiosssascasies 145 152 153 10 FISD EEAvrohah oa q 1 13 MaMe ar s A VaBe BB l A eS ie 0 Aperture stop indicator 121 374 I Aperture f number 120 122 Aperture number of stops 121 374 Bracketing increment 134 138 Number of shots in ADL bracketing SEQUENCE ssscinsnssssacsonicvssienstnsosnessiteneass 141 Maximum aperture MNON CPU lenses sesssescsseecsseecsseeene 8 Picture Control indicator HDR indicator H HDR exposure differential 180 J Multiple exposure indicator 196 Autofocus mode indicator 91 H Eye Fi connection indicator Image quality Secondary slot function g Image size 1516 17 18 19 20 21 l 22 MA i a _ baa H Shutter speed lock icon nae K appears when memory
284. pressed again or the shutter release button is pressed halfway Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off f11 Slot Empty Release Lock MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode If Release locked is selected the shutter release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera f12 Reverse Indicators MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If ehhh is selected the exposure indicators in the control panel viewfinder and information display are displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right Select he trisisisinse tO display positive values on the left and negative values on the right 319 320 f13 Assign MB D12 AF ON MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the function assigned to the AF ON button on the optional MB D12 battery pack A 15 p Option Description AF ON Pressing the MB D12 AF ON button initiates autofocus Press the MB D12 AF 0N button to lock flash value FV lock built in flash and compatible optional flash units only 190 382 Press again to cancel FV lock i AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the MB D12 AF ON
285. py Create copy Create copy 361 362 Selective Color MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color 1 Select Selective color RETOUCH MENU Miniature effect Selective color Edit movie e JE Highlight Selective color in the retouch menu and press gt to display a picture selection dialog aes Select a photograph Selective color E 100ND800 Highlight a photograph to z view the highlighted G epa pa photograph full frame press ES p and hold the amp button to view Zoom OK images in other locations as described on page 221 press 9 Press to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step Select a color Selected color Use the multi selector to a position the cursor over an object and press center of multi selector to select the color of the object as one that will Reset OF Mave remain in the final copy the camera may have difficulty detecting unsaturated colors choose a saturated color To zoom in on the picture for precise color selection press amp Press amp to zoom out 4 Highlight the color range Color range on ma Change Rotate the main command dial to highlight the color range for the selected color 5 Choose the color range Press A or to increase or decrease the range of similar hues that will be included in the final photograph or
286. r Angle of view 79 378 379 Aperture 120 122 126 Aperture lock 126 Aperture priority auto 120 Approved memory cards Aspect ratio Assign MB D12 AF ON Attaching the lens Auto White balance Auto bracketing sss Auto bracketing Mode M 308 Auto bracketing set 307 Auto distortion control a 276 Auto DX crop 79 82 Auto FP high speed sync 299 300 Auto image rotation eee 331 Auto ISO sensitivity control 111 Auto meter Off 42 218 291 Auto area AF Autofocus 48 50 91 100 281 286 AUTOFOCUS MOE eecesssssesssessesseesseees 48 91 B Backlig Niipea 4 296 BaCk Deiana na 89 Battery 19 21 37 297 298 332 387 Battery charger 19 387 432 Battery info aa 332 Battery order 298 Battery pack 104 297 298 320 387 BOO ssisssssseasdssdisaversaistssinresssisistaaiacistvats 292 Bit depth for NEF RAW images 86 BKT button 133 137 141 180 197 316 Black and white Monochrome 347 Blue intensifier 348 Body cap Border Bracketing Bracketing order Brightness Built in AF assist IIluminator 286 Built in flash Bulb Camera Control Pro 2 246 389 Capture NX 2 w 85 327 389 Center weighted metering 115 289 Charging the battery eee 19 20 Choose color temp White balance 146 152 Choose image area Choose start end point CL m
287. r EffeCtS iiuen A A 348 Golor Bala NG Eni nenni 349 Image Overlay 350 NEF RAW Processing 353 Resize sescsessscssecossceceseoes 355 QUICK Reto Chens n o e RN 357 Straighten net nii EAE RRE RE 357 Distortion Control ssssssssssssesseesssssereesssssereesssseneeessseereessseeeessssne 358 Fisheye oh otis aa E ERE OA RU 358 Color Outline 359 Color Sketch 0 359 Perspective Control sesecssessccssssccssescesssscsssescesstecssneeecenseessaees 360 xii Miniature Effect cecccsssesssesssesssessecssesssesssesssessesssesssesssssseesseeese Selective Color sseeesssssscssssccsssecssssseccsseecssuseccsneesesnsecssneeessaseees Side by Side Comparison My Menu 8 Recent Settings sssesscsscsssssscccssseescecsssesseseesseees Technical Notes 371 Compatible LENses sssscsssecssesccssecssecssseesseecssccesssccsseeesasensaseessees 371 Optional Flash Units Speedlights cssscssssccssecsseecsseecsseeesees 380 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS 381 Other ACCESSOLICS sessssssscsssecssssccssccsssccssscesuccesscecnsccsssecsssecssneesssees 387 Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter 391 Caring for the Camera sssecccssessccssssecssesecsssesecsssecsssseccnseessnseenssees 393 SLOVAG EAE EEEN A E E 393 Cleah iss cscssssscansecoosseansazesannesacsasecsdasevanchocarosspscsssnchoiieatdaeivenaeatcreve 393 The LOW PaSS Filter o seessssscssseccess
288. r values increase it T Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make 3 5 H reds more purple blues more green and greens more S ue yellow positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and blues more purple Z filter Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome 3 8 photographs Choose from OFF yellow orange red S amp effects of and green 0 167 3 Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from S Toning B amp W black and white Sepia Cyanotype blue tinted z monochrome Red Yellow Green Blue Green Blue Purple Blue Red Purple V 168 A A Auto Results for auto sharpening contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame Use a type G or D lens for best results The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 button in Step 2 on page 165 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the amp amp button to return to the Picture Control menu Q Contrast Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the
289. ra automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects the selected subject is indicated by a double yellow border if multiple faces up to a maximum of 35 are detected the camera will focus on the closest subject to choose a different subject use the multi selector If the camera can no longer detect the subject because for example the subject has turned to face away from the camera the border will no longer be displayed E WIDE Wide area AF Use for hand held shots of landscapes and other non portrait subjects Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in the frame or press the center of the multi selector to position the focus point in the center of the frame Eg NORM Normal area AF Use for pin point focus on a selected spot in the frame Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in the frame or press the center of the multi selector to position the focus point in the center of the frame A tripod is recommended Subject tracking AF Position the focus point over your subject and press the center of the multi selector The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame To end tracking press the center of the multi selector again 49 50 To choose an AF area mode press the AF mode button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the monitor AF mode Sub command Monitor button dial
290. ra is connected via an HDMI cable HDMI displays can be used for live view photography and movie live view 1 57 67 During movie live view and movie recording and playback HDMI output will be adjusted according to the option selected for Movie settings gt Frame size frame rate in the shooting menu M 70 Note that some HDMI devices may not support the selected setting in this case select 1080i interlaced for HDMI gt Output resolution 1 257 sss Menu Guide gt The Playback Menu Managing Images To display the playback menu press MENU and select the PJ playback menu tab PLAYBACK MENU PLAYBACK MENU Playback folder Hide image T Playback display options Ei Copy image s Image review After delete Rotate tall MENU button Option oO Delete 236 Playback folder 260 Hide image 260 Playback display options 261 Copy image s 262 Image review 265 After delete 266 Rotate tall 266 Slide show 267 DPOF print order 254 See Also Menu defaults are listed on page 405 259 Playback Folder MENU button gt Bl playback menu Choose a folder for playback 219 Option Description Pictures in all folders created with the D800 will be visible during playback All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback Hide Image MENU button g
291. racketing indicator At settings other than zero a icon and an ADL bracketing indicator will 2556 Of oa appear in the control panel and BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active D Lighting off and another at a selected value Choose three to five shots to take a series of photographs with Active D Lighting set to Off Low and Normal three shots Off Low Normal and High four shots or Off Low Normal High and Extra high five shots If you choose more than two shots proceed to Step 4 141 3 Select Active D Lighting Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose Active D Lighting BKT button Sub command dial Active D Lighting is shown in the control panel Control panel display Active D Lighting EAA Auto BAL Low GAN Normal EAH High EAH Extra high 142 4 Framea photograph focus and 4 shoot lt a The camera will vary Active D Lighting shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot 143 144 Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is
292. ral Minimal processing for natural results Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched ENI Vivid Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors EHC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs EPT Portrait Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel ELS Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes 1 Press On F2 A list of Picture Controls will be displayed Set Picture Control ESD Standard i ENL Neutral EVI Vivid EMC Monochrome EPT Portrait ELS Landscape L_ Grid CAdiust Om 2 7 button 163 2 Select a Picture Control Set Picture Control ESD Standard r 5 ENL Neutral Highlight the desired 7 EMC Monochrome Picture Control and press SPT Portrait ELS Landscape button 164 Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the shooting menu M 169 Custom Picture Controls can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other D800 cameras and compatible software M 172 The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the information display when th
293. rame as a JPEG still WN Choose start end point Trimming Movies To create trimmed copies of movies 1 Display a movie full frame Press the P button to display pictures full frame in the monitor and press lt i and to scroll through l b tton pictures until the movie you wish to edit is displayed 2 Choosea starting or end merra point Play the movie back as described on page 72 pressing the center of the multi selector to start and resume playback and to pause or rotating the main command dial to skip to an index Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar Movie progress bar 3 Display movie edit options Edit movie Press to display movie ee eters edit options button 4 Select Choose start end po i nt Edit movie Highlight Choose start es T end point and press The dialog shown at right will be displayed choose ee ee whether the current frame ps the che Dole p will be the starting or end End point point of the copy and press ance 5 Delete frames If the desired frame is not currently displayed press lt or gt to advance or rewind to skip to an index rotate the main command dial To switch the current selection from start point to end point F or vice versa press Om 3 7 Om F2 Once you have selected the st
294. ration is required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately recalibrate battery before charging e Calibration not required Battery age A five level display showing battery age 0 4 indicates that battery performance is unimpaired 4 T8 that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced Note that fresh batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary drop in charging life the battery age display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher The MB D12 Battery Pack The display for the MB D12 is shown at right In Battery info A R D800 MB D12 the case of EN EL18 batteries the display shows aise Kot ae whether calibration is required If AA batteries nots 8 15 are used the battery level will be shown by a Bate ae_ 0 battery level icon other items will not be displayed Image Comment MENU button gt setup menu Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately Q 389 The comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display 0 228 Done Save changes and return to the setup menu Input comment Input a comment as described on page 170 Comments can be up to 36 characters long Attach comment Select
295. re flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay Q 291 Selecting a Preset Selecting Preset manual for the White balance option in the shooting menu displays the dialog a shown at right highlight a preset and press If no value currently exists for the selected preset white balance will be set to 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight DSelect_CVOK 157 158 Copying White Balance from a Photograph Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an existing photograph to a selected preset 1 Select PRE Preset White balance g choose color temp manual for White PRE Preset manual balance in the shooting menu Adiust Press the MENU button and select White balance in the shooting menu Highlight Preset manual and press P MENU button 2 Select a destination White balance Highlight the destination post vn preset d 1 to d 4 and press EA Ea d 1 the center of the multi selector LORY Taam MOK 3 Choose Select image White balance ia Preset manual Highlight Select image and press gt Edit comment Select image Protect d 2 4 Highlight a source image Highlight the source image To view the highlighted image full frame press the amp button To view images in other locations press 8 amp 3 and select the desired card and folder I 221 White balance Se
296. re mode Setting P Shutter speed and aperture flexible program M 118 5 Shutter speed A Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect changes to metering take effect when the lock is released See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L 290 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the t AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button M 315 129 fol Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pictures brighter or darker Itis most effective when used with center weighted or spot metering 4 115 Choose from values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 1 3 EV In general positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker 1 EV No exposure 1 EV compensation To choose a value for exposure compensation press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the viewfinder or control panel Main command dial HO Ee CI 0 EV 0 3 EV 4 button pressed 130 At values other than 0 0 the 0 at the center of the exposure indicators will flash exposure modes FP 5 and A on
297. recording Nd CAtOT oo eeseeeecscssseececcssseseeecesnseeees 156 ADL bracketing amount 142 314 Time lapse recording indicator Manual lens number Capture mode indicator The Viewfinder Display 1 2 ooo i OS O O Yooo oo0o000000000 000001 O000 o000 E i 00 oo0gp9 Se o 2000 9000 PTET ITLL A KELLLLELLLICCLLLLLLLIS a Framing grid displayed when On is selected for Custom Setting d6 monnaie oa naas 295 Focus points 40 96 284 285 Fi AF area MOe vessesscssessessseese 93 94 E AF area brackets 0 35 223 E Virtual horizon display 313 5 Focus indicator 40 102 maA OH oe 21 22 23 24 25 6 stern os rsiccassvtsatenscattce 115 7 Autoexposure AE lOcK sssssses 128 EJ Shutter speed lock icon 126 Shutter speed 119 122 P Autofocus mode E Aperture lock icon at 127 Aperture f number 120 122 Aperture number of stops rE AEE INE 121 374 BEY Exposure mode sssmsetsnenns EJ Flash compensation indicator 188 Exposure compensation k Indicator ssssssssserssssssssseerssssreessessssse 130 ISO sensitivity sssssssssssssssser1ssssssse 109 Preset white balance recording indicator 156 ADL bracketing amount 314 AF area MOE 93 94 95 Number of exposures remaining 00 escseecs
298. rect measurement mode Release the WB button briefly and then press the button until the PRE icon in the control panel starts to flash A flashing F will also appear in the viewfinder The displays will flash for about six seconds Viewfinder 5 Measure white balance Before the indicators stop flashing frame the N reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in the preset selected in Step 3 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus Protected Presets If the current preset is protected M 161 amp will flash in the control panel and viewfinder if you attempt to measure a new value 6 Check the results If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panel for about six seconds while the viewfinder will show a flashing id If lighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing na Se will appear in the control panel and viewfinder for about six seconds Press the shutter release button halfway to Control panel return to Step 5 and measure white no ud tt TN balance again 7 Viewfinder 7 Direct Measurement Mode IIf no operations are performed while the displays a
299. relatively even If the image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left 9 e distribution will be shifted to the hes We If the image is bright tone Nea cS b gt right wea Bap wy h Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor BE Shooting Data Sei Exposure compensation E e Optimal exposure tuning Focal length R 0 s in lens data 0 A 0 Focus mode l Lens VR vibration reduction 3 WONAUAWN ON 08 0p Flash type 10 Ant Commander mode FJ Flash mode Metering method Flash control Shutter speed K Flash compensation Aperture 10 Camera name H ae i 1 EE 79 EA Folder number frame number 271 E p Color space cnscmenenenenenenesen 3 p WHITE BALANCE AUTOT 0 0 Picture Control 18 E Ick DSTO re 18 N 0 Original Picture Control 6 20 a fA Sharpening EH Contrast ON D80 0 E Brightness White balance Saturation 7 Color temperature White balance fine tuning Preset manual 227 RW ONAN 228 Ele High ISO noise reduc
300. rise and noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may be displayed in the following instances the camera may also become noticeably warm but this does not indicate a malfunction The ambient temperature is high The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods If live view does not start when you press the amp button wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again Movie recording is not available during live view photography Select movie live view M 59 to shoot movies M The Count Down Display A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically Q 51 the timer turns red if live view is about to end to protect the internal circuits or if an option other than No limit is selected for Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay Q 292 5 s before the monitor is due to turn off automatically Depending on shooting conditions the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected Note that although the count down does not appear during playback live view will still end automatically when the timer expires HDMI If the camera is attached to an HDMI video device during live view photography the camera monitor will remain on and the video device will display the view through the lens as shown at right Press the MA button to turn the histogram display on
301. roduce the optimal exposure Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects fast shutter speeds to freeze motion ku STA peed 171 600 s Slow shutter speed 1 6 s Fast shutter s To choose a shutter speed rotate the main o command dial while j the exposure meters 5 co EA SS are on Shutter speed can be set to x 25 or to values between 30 s and s 000s Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting 1 126 Main command dial 119 fol 120 A Aperture Priority Auto In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure Large apertures low f numbers increase flash range M 187 and reduce depth of field blurring objects behind and in front of the main subject Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field bringing out details in the background and foreground Short field depths are generally used in portraits to blur background details long field depths in landscape photographs to bring the foreground and background into focus Small aperture f 36 To choose an aperture between the minimum and maximum values for the lens rotate the sub command dial while the exposure meters are on Aperture can be locked at the selected setting 1 126 Sub comman
302. rom lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture Choose from High Normal Low and Off Vignette Control Depending on the scene shooting conditions and type of lens TIFF and JPEG images may exhibit noise fog or variations in peripheral brightness while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect Take test shots and view the results in the monitor Vignette control does not apply to movies M 59 or multiple exposures OQ 195 or DX format images M 79 275 276 Auto Distortion Control MENU button gt shooting menu Select On to reduce barrel distortion in Auto distortion control photos taken with wide angle lenses andto gi reduce pin cushion distortion in photos taken with long lenses note that the edges of the area visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph and that the time needed to process photographs before recording begins may increase This option does not apply to movies and is available only with type G and D lenses PC fisheye and certain other lenses excluded results are not guaranteed with other lenses Before using auto distortion control with DX lenses select On for Auto DX crop or choose an image area of DX 24x16 1 5x 80 selecting other options may result in heavily cropped photographs or in photographs with severe peripheral distortion Retouch
303. ry contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused Index Symbols P Programmed auto 5 Shutter priority auto R Aperture priority auto 120 M Manual 122 S caissaasissssassesosesnsensss ndssosssdatnsssstadvtnasbasssiess 103 C Single point AF J Dynamic area AF as Gi Auto area AF sssssssssssssssssessssseecesesss Face priority AF f Wide area AF ka Normal area AF 3 Subject tracking AF ss Matrix c cccecsccccssesssssessssssssessessesseees 115 Center weighted 115 289 2 SPOt ssssissssnssscseiscosassstascsaiaissnensscassisoes Fn button EB Info button r Memory buffer SWITCH eccseeescsseees Focus indicator PRE Preset Manual uu 146 154 Numerics 3D color matrix metering III 3D tracking 5 4 30 x 24 A AC adapter Accessories 387 Accessory shoe Active D Lighting Add items My Menu ADL bracketing Adobe RGB Color space 274 AE amp flash Auto bracketing set 132 307 AE only Auto bracketing set 132 307 AE L AF L button wees 98 315 323 AF sa sssseisvasionstniees 48 50 91 100 281 286 AF ACTIVATION scasssscsseatassnsesnesnsonconsassivavenss AF area brackets AF fine tune After delete A M SWITCH sssssssesessssses Ambient brightness senso
304. s sssssecsseeee 174 Active D Lighting 0 2 scssssccssseccsseesessecsssescesecssssecessseesssutecsaneees 174 High Dynamic Range HDR sssssssssscsssssesssssecesseeccsnseessseeseeaee 176 Flash Photography 181 Using the Built in FlaSh essssssssssesessoesssesoooesunesoeoosossoveeseesoesesessosees 181 Flash MOGES ikisimama 183 Flash Compensation sceccsssccsesccssecsssscssecesseecssecessecessecsasecesseessseeses 188 BV losk nerona aAA s 190 Other Shooting Options 193 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings s 193 Multiple ExPOSUre ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssreesessssssessereeesessssseserereeesssssse 195 Interval Timer Photography ssssssesssssssssssssssresssseseesssssseesssssseeessse 201 Time Lapse Photography un cssssescsssesccssesccsssesecsseccsssecessseeeensees 207 NOM CPU LENSES sasssssscssssseasssssssssacestissscnsestssviadstascuctsstinrasiusstveciteates 212 Using AGPS UM Ciscsnsssccasssssesosssseccsvessssdeonrssceousedecsessesovssssessitaseebscesestess 215 vii More About Playback 219 Viewing IMAGES sssssecsscscssssnssossecoosssescessssssesssssorsssssooszoorsientesestonsosesaoness 219 Full Frame Playback uu sssssssssssccssssesesessssesessssssessecsnseesecennseesees 219 Thumbnail Playback ssssssessscssseessesssseesssssssecsecssneesseennnseees 219 Playback Controls sssssesssssssssessessssessccsssessscesssesecsnsnessesnnseeses 220 Photo Information sesccsssssccssesccssseeccsss
305. s internal circuitry Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait EE Manual Cleaning If foreign matter can not be removed from the low pass filter using the Clean image sensor M 394 option in the setup menu the filter can be cleaned manually as described below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon authorized service personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pass filter Turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL15 battery or connect an optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5b AC adapter 2 Remove the lens Turn the camera off and remove the lens 3 Select Lock mirror up WS Lock mirror up for cleaning for cleaning g a on MENU button Turn the camera on and press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu and press gt note that this option is not available at battery levels of or below 4 Press j j When shutter release button i The message shown at right will be resets seed en displayed in the monitor and a row of A Rae eae dashes will appear in the control panel and viewfinder To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off 5 Raise the mirror Press the shutter rel
306. s 103 Remote COrd ssssssssssessssesseresssseess 124 390 Remove items My Menu 368 Removing the lens from the camera 25 Repeating flash 301 Reset we 193 Resize 355 Restoring default settings 193 405 Retouch menu we 341 Reverse indicators RGB Histogram Rotate tall S S small Saturation Save selected frame Save load settings Screen tips SD memory Car Secondary slot function Selective color Self timer Sensitivity Sepia Monochrome Set Picture Control Setup MENU eeescsssteccsssecrsseccsseeseeseees Shade White balance Sharpening Shooting data Shooting menu Shooting Menu bank esses 269 Shutter speed uu esses Shutter speed lock Shutter priority auto 119 Shutter release button 40 41 98 128 290 324 Shutter release button AE L 290 Side by side COMpAFiSON 00 364 Single frame ossesesssseseceessecceesseeseeenne 103 Single point AF s ssssssssssssssssssssssrsssss 93 95 48 91 282 68 87 346 Size priority JPEG compression 86 Skylight M Slide show Slot empty release lock Slot selection ss Slow sync Smoothing Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR 185 382 Start printing Storage folder Stra ig hite tics scstescstatescccessivsesnetacereece T Television 0 256 Ten pin remote terminal Thumbnail TIFF RGB Time s
307. s 2a A or Y to adjust monitor brightness y note that monitor brightness has no effect on photographs taken with the camera If A auto is selected and the monitor is on the camera will automatically adjust brightness in response to ambient lighting conditions as measured by the ambient brightness sensor CQ 5 amp button 53 The Information Display Live View Photography To hide or display indicators in the monitor during live view photography press the i button Virtual horizon ZO 337 Information on Information off AF S Fes eIFFE ISD ESDA igol ik Histogram exposure preview only M 46 54 Manual Focus To focus in manual focus mode M 101 rotate the lens focus ring until the subject is in focus To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 23 x for precise focus press the amp button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor available only if wide or normal area AF is selected for AF area mode or press 8 to zoom out WA er iy 3 amp button Navigation window Non CPU Lenses Exposure what is seen in the monitor When using non CPU lenses be sure to enter the focal length and maximum ap
308. s at intervals of 0 5 1 2 or3s Exposure Metering TTL exposure metering using RGB sensor with approximately 91K 91 000 pixels Metering method Matrix 3D color matrix metering Ill type G and D lenses color matrix metering III other CPU lenses color matrix metering available with non CPU lenses if user provides lens data Center weighted Weight of 75 given to 12 mm circle in center of frame Diameter of circle can be changed to 8 15 or 20 mm or weighting can be based on average of entire frame non CPU lenses use 12 mm circle or average of entire frame Spot Meters 4 mm circle about 1 5 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus point when non CPU lens is used Range ISO 100 f 1 4 lens 20 C 68 F Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV Spot metering 2 20 EV Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and Al Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program F shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A manual M Exposure compensation 5 5 EV in increments of 3 2 or 1 EV Exposure bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV Flash bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV Exposure white balance 2 9 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 bracketing ADL bracketing 2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3 5 frames using preset values for all frames Exposure lock Luminosity lo
309. s feature is used to lock flash output allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture To use FV lock 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button esata n Dutton press 7 OLGEI Select FV lock for Custom Setting f4 Assign Fn button gt Fn button press as Me AE lock Reset on release m 311 S AE lock Hold a AF lock only 2 Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging 3 Focus Position the subject in the _ center of the frame and press v the shutter release button Z halfway to focus 4 Lock flash level After confirming that the flash ready C indicator is displayed in the Q viewfinder press the Fn button The N flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level Fn button Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock icon m will appear in the CARET viewfinder 5 Recompose the photograph 6 Takethe photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock 7 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock Confirm that the FV
310. s to protect the lens To prevent ghosting use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over 1x Y44 Y48 Y52 056 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 See the filter manual for details PC card adapters PC Card Adapter EC AD1 The EC AD1 PC card adapter allows Type CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots Software Capture NX 2 A complete photo editing package with such advanced editing features as selection control points and an auto retouch brush e Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software see the websites listed on page xx for the latest information on supported operating systems At default settings Nikon Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to Nikon software and firmware while you are logged in to an account on the computer and the computer is connected to the Internet A message is automatically displayed when an update is found Body caps Body Cap BF 1B Body Cap BF 1A The body cap keeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place Microphones Stereo Microphone ME 1
311. seccssseccneessssssersneeseeusecesneeeeees 260 THUG ACS nisreen a RRA 260 Playback Display Options cscssssssccssscssssesecsseesssntecssneeeeees 261 GOPY MAGE S ssstsscsssssssusssasesssccassanvniysaasssansssasccbentansassiauanivenaienen 262 IMAGE REVIEW uu escsescsesssecssccossssesseeessecsossusssssesesessssasssscessessesees 265 After Delete scscssassssssseseacssesssecentansensconsseconsenstassorninseeegeonassennconuese 266 viii ROtate Tallinnaa iienaa 266 Slide SHOW isi saree t REEERE 267 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Options ss ssssssssessssssssssessss 268 Shooting Menu BanK ss sssssssssssssesresssssereessssseresssssereensssenresss 269 Extended Menu Banks sscssssssccssessessseccsseccssseeccsneeeesneeeessees 270 Storage Folder viii naceeincnaweatia ices tance 271 File Na Ming sosisini 273 Color Space 1274 Vignette Control 275 Auto Distortion Control sesessssesscsssecessessccsseecssseecsssessenseees 276 Long Exposure NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction ssecsssesceeseecessees 277 High SONR ainiaan nents 277 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings 278 CUSTOM Settings BANk ssscccssseccssescccseeccsneeceeneecessetecesseees 280 A AUtOfOCUS neeesa eer EEE EEEE aenn 281 a1 AF C Priority Selection 281 a2 AF S Priority Selection 282 a3 Focus Tracking with Lock On 283 a4 AF Activation sesseseesseeeeesesssssssssssuesuusuuseesee
312. secssseeecsseeecsssseesseeeeenseeeess 222 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM ssssssssssccssessesseeesenseeees 231 Protecting Photographs from Deletion secssessesssesseeseeeees 233 Deleting Photographs seesssssscssssscssssescssseecsssescssseccsssesesseesene 234 Full Frame and Thumbnail Playback 234 The Playback Menu ne sssssssssessssssssssssessccssssssssssesssssssssssseeseees 236 Connections 239 CONNECTING tO a COMPUTED sssssessseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeee 239 Before Connecting the CaMera seecccssecsssssccsseesesneecssneeeeeee 239 Direct USB Connection sssssessssssssooeoesssooesssssoroosssseoocsssoseoosssssse 243 Ethernet and Wireless Networks 0 ssssssssssssseessecssseesscenneeesees 245 Printing PHOtographs sssecsssssscsssseccssseccssseecsssseessssceesseceenseeeess 247 Connecting the Printer eeseccsesecccsssccssesecsseesssstecesaeeseeneesesees 248 Printing Pictures One at a TIME seessescsesecseceseeessecenseeenees 249 Printing Multiple Pictures cssssscssssssccsseeccssseccsseseeseesssnteesse 251 Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set 0 0 254 Viewing Photographs on TV ssssssssssssecsssesesssesecsssssecsseeeenseeeessees 256 HOMIOPtIOMS ssscssesesscscsasconsessasccnvesnesesvassessesesioeetvnctasconsbecodonrteceveess 257 Menu Guide 259 gt The Playback Menu Managing IMages sssssseccssseseenees 259 Playback Foldet ssssscsssssscssssscss
313. see page 193 EE Playback Menu Defaults Option Default Playback folder M 260 ND800 Image review M 265 Off After delete M 266 Show next Rotate tall M 266 On Slide show QQ 267 Image type M 267 Still images and movies Frame interval M 267 2s BE Shooting Menu Defaults Option Default Extended menu banks M 270 Off File naming 273 DSC Primary slot selection M 89 SD card slot Secondary slot function M 89 Overflow Image quality 1 84 JPEG normal Image size M 87 Large Image area M 79 Auto DX crop 2179 On Choose image area 80 FX 36x24 JPEG compression M 86 Size priority NEF RAW recording 86 Type CO 86 Lossless compressed NEF RAW bit depth 86 14 bit White balance M 145 Auto gt Normal Fine tuning CO 148 A B 0 G M 0 Choose color temp M 152 5000 K Preset manual M 154 d 1 Option Default Set Picture Control 163 Standard Color space M 274 sRGB Active D Lighting V 174 Off HDR high dynamic range 1 176 HDR mode M 177 Off Exposure differential N 178 Auto Smoothing M 178 Normal Vignette control i 275 Normal Auto distortion control A 276 Off Long exposure NR 277 Off High ISO NR 277 Normal ISO sensitivity settings A 109 ISO sensitivity A 109 100 Auto ISO sensitiv
314. ser was scrolling through pictures in reverse order previous picture will be displayed as described for Show previous Rotate Tall MENU button gt playback menu Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures for display during playback Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review Md Continue as before Eiis Option Description Tall portrait orientation pictures are automatically rotated for display in the camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for On Auto image rotation 2 331 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in wide landscape orientation 266 Slide Show MENU button gt playback menu Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder 260 Hidden images M 260 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Choose type of image displayed from Still images and Image type movies Still images only and Movies only Frame interval Choose how long each photo will be displayed To start the slide show highlight Start and p Slideshow press The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in Image type oR progress Frame interval 2s To Pr
315. seseososcseseseseoeosososeseoeese Q The Q amp A Index s000 Q The Quick Start Guide s Q THe Md kennon ana an a a a eai Error Messages PEA O OEE AET 0417 Troubleshooting sssssseseeesssecceeecesssecseeseceeesoceseoecesoeoesseesereeee m 412 Introduction Tutorial Live View Photography E Movie Live View Kz Image Recording Options Focus Release Mode ISO Sensitivity m 109 Exposure Mi White Balance Image Enhancement Flash Photography 181 E Other Shooting Options E More About Playback Connections Menu Guide Technical Notes 371 Q amp A Index Find what you re looking for using this question and answer index Taking Photographs m Q Shooting and Framing Options Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots xxi 37 Can I frame photos in the monitor 4 live view photography 13 Can I shoot movies 4 movie live view 59 Can join photographs taken at regular intervals to 207 create a time lapse movie Q Release Modes Can I take photos in quick succession 103 How do I take pictures with the self timer 106 a Focus Can I choose how the camera focuses 91 Can I choose the focus point 96 Q Exposure Can I make photos brighter or darker 130 How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights 174 176 Q Using the Flash How do I use the flash 181 Q Image Quality and Size How do I take pictures for printing at large s
316. sesssssssscssssccsesecssseecesneeceeee 319 12 Reverse Indicators ceessessssssesssessesssesssesseesseessesssesseesseess 319 13 Assign MB D12 AF ON esssssscsssesccssteccsseesesnsecssneeeseee 320 g1 ASSIGN Fn Button ou ee esssesssecssecsecnsccssecnsecsecsscenssensesseesees g2 ASSIGN Preview Button ou escsessssssecseecseesteesseeneesseesees g3 Assign AE L AF L button g4 Assign Shutter Button Y The Setup Menu Camera Setup cseccsssccssecsssessssessssecsseesssees Format Memory Card sssscsssssscsssessesssscsssessesnsscssneesenseesssees Monitor Brightness Image Dust Off Ref Photo Flicker Reduction ea Time Zone and Date esccssesccsssecssssecssneeccsnsecssnseecesseceeseeeesee LANG UAC C ssid sesh ccsievsasssavastaatvascartsnsdasniansbeassaaitterectanniescetenete Auto Image ROTATION sessesseeseecsecescessecssecnsceseenssenseessessees Battery NfO inse ane A h Image Comment s Copyright INformMation secccssseccssessccsecessesecseeesseeecssseees Save LOad Settings sescsccsssesscscssssecsssssneecsecsssessecssseeseeesssees Virtual OMI ZO as csiees ised sneseascescecnssetesayececonesenaweeesteaacateecatanties PAF Fine TUNE di R Eye Fi Upload Firmware VersSiOn ssssssssssssssssssseseeeeeeeereeeeeeeeesessssss ee K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies 341 DELI htiN Girarda 344 Red Eye Correction 345 TriMike 346 Monochrome 347 Filte
317. setting Use this as a reference when adjusting settings Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs The following filter effects are available Option Description Yellow Enhances contrast Can be used to tone down the brightness of Orange the sky in landscape photographs Orange produces more Red contrast than yellow red more contrast than orange A Do lt Green Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters 167 168 Toning Monochrome Only Pressing W when Toning is selected displays Monochrome saturation options Press lt or gt to adjust EE Sharpening saturation Saturation control is not available when B amp W black and white is selected Filter effects Sepia Grid Reset MOK Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based Creating Custom Picture Controls The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture SHOOTING MENU P fc Image area Control in the shooting S JPEG compression Hs NEF RAW recording menu White balance AUTON set Picture Control
318. sh Commander mode K Built in flash Group A Group B Channel Adjust settings for group B Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group B Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode Mode Comp 7 Built in flash Group A Group B u Channel O cH Select the channel Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode Mode Comp 7 Built in flash TTL Group A mL 7 Group B u Channel E cH MOK Press 6 6 Compose the shot Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions Wireless remote 10 m 60 or less 33 ft or A 30 gt i l sensors on flash J ul K torless units should face KO camera je wee ra K mj 60 or less 15 ft or less 7 Configure the remote flash units Turn all the remote flash units on adjust group settings as desired and set them to the channel selected in Step 4 See the flash unit instruction manuals for details 8 Raise the built in flash Press the flash pop up button to raise the built in flash Note that even if is selected for Built in flash gt Mode the built in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be emitted 9 Framethe photograph focus and shoot After confirming that the camera flash ready light and the flash ready lights for a
319. sh units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced xix Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com For users in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http imaging nikon com Quick Start Guide Follow these steps for a quick start with the D800 1 Attach the camera strap Attach the strap securely to the camera eyelets 4 inserta memory card M 29 Xxi 5 Turn the camera on 37 See Als
320. sneees 77 Image Recording Options 79 WAGES ALA cscaissssccussicesssssesestinncasssuserasesiosiesousensessanssoscasisussndessbscteepsossess 79 Image Quality 84 MAJE SIZC ie sscuscnssccssssssscusscasasseccssennsecssctasnsuscsuscodecssesesssniescbscisostnatsascsbests 87 Using Two Memory Cards ssssssccsssssccsssecsssseccsnssecssseecsssseessnseessses 89 Focus 91 PULOTOCUS sss cecccsssscdcasadscosccsiebshdssccascsossetesbadbdousoessosortdesterssessesbsiesstesoussteie 91 Autofocus Mode cscssssssesssesssssesssesssesssessesssesssesssessecesesssesseeseesseees 91 AF Area MO w cecssssssssssesssessesssesssessesssessscssccssesssessseesecescsasesssesseesseess 93 FOCUS Point Selection cessesssesssesssessesssesssessssssesssesssessssesessseesseeses 96 FOCUS LOGK siscccsscsssccsstssstchschonstcscsiesstvssssosdescssstebdsguacabeaasosbsnssveastecasstane 98 Manual FOCUS enni eaaa Tain 101 Release Mode 103 Choosing a Release Mode ssssssssssessessssssseesssssseesssssseesesssseeessssese 103 Power Source and Frame Rate csecssssssessssssessesseessessseesseesees 104 Self Timet Mod assennati 106 Mirror up MOE sssssssssccsseccssccssecessccsuscesssecsuscesseecssseessseesseeesseesaee 108 ISO Sensitivity 109 Manual Adjustment Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Exposure 115 MGI lng sssssssssssssstsecsnsisesisssaconshaedessonsanesoasesctobovocsasesisosonsogavosisedsvaveesi rian Exposure MO Gisssssssissscscct
321. splayed include an additional page of GPS data M 229 flashing The GPS device is searching for a signal Pictures taken while the icon is flashing do not include GPS data Noicon No new GPS data have been received from the GPS device for at least two seconds Pictures taken when the icon is not displayed do not include GPS data Heading The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is equipped with a digital compass note that the GP 1 is not equipped with a compass Keep the GPS device pointing in the same direction as the lens and at least 20cm 8 in from the camera Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock 217 HE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below Auto meter off Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached Option Description Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay Q 291 to allow the camera time to Enable acquire GPS data when a GP 1 is connected the delay is extended by up to one minute after exposure meters are activated or the camera is turned on This reduces the drain on the battery Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is connected GPS data will always be recorded e Position T
322. sscicsdcancessesdessavecosssndsassvsearaescosnscsatesecdstecsents P Programmed Auto ssssesscscssssesssessssessecssseessecssssesessnseeesensee 5 Shutter Priority Auto A Aperture Priority Auto PEMA Ua ssccsssccsnscscsscetesssscannsseccacesssasevansvecarncssscsnsncaoicenrsassscnavdeeseves LONG TiME EXPOSULES seessessssesssesseesseessessessssssssssscssessessseesseessees Shutter Speed and Aperture LOCK ccessssecssecsecsseecstescseessees 126 Autoexposure AE LOCK essssssssssssssssesssecsscsssesscsssesssccssccsscessessseess Exposure Compensation Bracke tir Gsissscssssdscsssssctavcsesnssecchaissstnsadesbassscnusatesnsaiesuas ecbasevehedaccrnavevenns vi White Balance 145 White Balance Options csssssecsssesssecssecseesessecsseeesseecssseesaeessees 145 Fine Tuning White Balance ssssssssscsssssccssseessssescssessesseeeesnsess 148 Choosing a Color Temperature ssesccssssccssesecssssecssnseeesnseeeseee 152 Preset Manual Image Enhancement 163 Picture COMECONS assssccccucscscssstacens ocessccssssavosarsexecssiscesstesssascsacssbnsteviscies 163 Selecting a Picture Control seesssssecssstsscestecssssscecssecsenstecseneees 163 Modifying Existing Picture COntrols ssssssccsseccssesecseesssees 165 Creating Custom Picture Controls eesssecsssssceseccssetecesseees 169 Sharing Custom Picture CONtrOlS ssesssseccssesceesecssseecesseees 172 Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadow
323. ssion e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Notices for Customers in Europe Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area address provided separately ATTENTION Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries All batteries whether marked with this symbol or
324. ssion Fn button Assign preview button 278 The following Custom Settings are available Custom Setting mal Custom Setting om Custom settings bank 280 e Bracketing flash a Autofocus e1 Flash sync speed 299 al AF C priority selection 281 e2 Flash shutter speed 300 a2 AF S priority selection 282 amp 3 Flash control for built in flash 301 a3 Focus tracking with lock on 283 e4 Modeling flash 307 a4 AF activation 283 e5 Auto bracketing set 307 a5 AF point illumination 284 e6 Auto bracketing Mode M 308 a6 Focus point wrap around 284 e7 Bracketing order 308 a7 Number of focus points 285 f Controls a8 Built in AF assist illuminator 286 fi switch 309 b Metering exposure f2 Multi selector center button 309 b1 ISO sensitivity step value 287 f3 Multi selector 310 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 287 f4 Assign Fn button 311 b3 Exp flash comp step value 287 f5 Assign preview button 315 b4 Easy exposure compensation 288 f6 Assign AE L AF L button 315 b5 Center weighted area 289 f7 Shutter spd amp aperture lock 316 b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 290 f8 Assign BKT button 316 c Timers AE lock f9 Customize command dials 317 cl Shutter release button AE L 290 f10 Release button to use dial 318 c2 Auto meter off delay 291 _ f11 Slot empty release lock 319 3 Self timer
325. ssssccssesscsssecssseeceenseessneeesesseeees 32 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS sssscsssssscsssesscsssecssseseccsseesssseeessneeesees 35 Basic Photography and Playback 0 essssssscssseecssseeesssseerssseeesnee 37 Turn the Camera ON sssssseessccsssessseesssseseesssssecsecsnssseecsnssesesensssecs 37 Ready the Camesra e csesccsssscsssessccnsecssnssesssneecssnteccenseeesaneeessneessssees 39 FOCUS ANC SHOOK sessssssssessecssseessccssseesecesssseceesnssesesessssecseessseeeeessee 40 Viewing Photograpls sssccsssscsssssccsecsesseescsssecssusecssnseessneseeaee 43 Deleting Unwanted Photographs sesscsssssccssseccssesesesesssnees 44 Live View Photography 45 FOCUSING IN LIVE VIEW uu eessesssstesssesssstesssesssessseessssssssessstesssesssessses 48 The Live View Display Live View Photography 00 51 The Information Display Live View Photography 54 Manual FOCUS sisisi 55 Movie Live View 59 lote tE AE E E E E E 63 The Live View Display Movie Live View ssss sssssssssssssrsssssese 64 The Information Display Movie Live VieW cssssecsseeeees 66 MAGE ALCS I E A E E 67 Movie Settings ssssssssssesssesssesssssssssseeereeseeesssssssssoroeeeceeeessssssssessseteeee 70 Viewing Movies fas Editing Movi caroreenrinoni anna TriMMING MOVIES csssessstsssseesssessssessseessseesssesssessssessseessessseenssess 74 Saving Selected FramMes sssssccsssecsssescccseecessseecseecesneeessneees
326. subject moves focus again at the new distance See Also See Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L N 290 for information on using the shutter release button to lock exposure Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button 2 315 for information AE L on choosing the role played by it AE L AF L button 99 100 Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus In these cases use manual focus Q 101 or use focus lock M 98 to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background Example Subject is the same color as the background Isr een The focus point contains objects at different distances l LA from the camera i Ke Example Subject is inside a cage 4 a The subject is dominated by regular geometric 2 i patterns l l BRICE Example Blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper Hee Injen mel The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting br
327. t 321 g2 Assign Preview Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the depth of field preview button during movie live view Option Description Aperture narrows while the button is pressed Use in Power aperture combination with Custom Setting g1 Assign Fn close button gt Power aperture open for button controlled aperture adjustment Press the button during movie recording to add an Index marking index at the current position M 63 Indices can be used when viewing and editing movies Press the button to display information on shutter View photo speed aperture and other photo settings in place of shootinginfo movie recording information Press again to return to the movie recording display None Pressing the button has no effect Power Aperture Power aperture is available only in exposure modes A and Mand can not be used during recording or while photo shooting info is displayed a amp icon indicates that power aperture can not be used The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted 322 g3 Assign AE L AF L button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the t AE L AF L button during movie live view Option Description Index marking Press the button during movie recording to add an index at the current position M 63 Indices can be used when viewing and editing movies
328. t playback menu Hide or reveal selected pictures as described below Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card ND800 Current Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image 1 Choose Select set p Hide image Select set Ed 100ND800 Highlight Select set and z press gt to skip the remaining Tee Kell Fe steps and reveal all pictures Ea P i highlight Deselect all and DSet_CWZoom MOK press 260 2 Select pictures p Hide image Select set Use the multi selector to scroll E e through the pictures on the Kem FA memory card to view the Ea ra p highlighted picture full screen OSet Zoom CMOK press and hold the amp button to view images in other locations press 9 and select the desired card and folder as described on page 221 and press the center of the multi selector to select the current picture Selected pictures are marked by a icon to deselect a picture highlight it and press the center of the multi selector 3 Press Press 9 to complete the operation Nikon Ii button Playback Display Options MENU button Cl playback menu Choose the information available in the playback photo information display 222 Press A or W to highlight an option then press gt to select the option f
329. t 316 JE Active D Lighting eceeenen 175 A Long exposure noise E Color space aaicccrer contents 274 reduction F Depth of field preview button E Custom settings bank assignment J Fn button assignment Tool Tips A tool tip giving the name of the selected item appears in the information display Tool tips can be turned off using Custom Setting d8 Screen tips N 295 cma a E GSA Om BKT a A 13 The BM 12 Monitor Cover A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use To attach the cover insert the projection on the top of the cover into the matching indentation above the camera monitor and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place To remove the cover hold the camera firmly and pull the bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right Tutorial Camera Menus Most shooting playback and setup options qe SS can be accessed from the camera menus To view the menus press the MENU button MENU button Tabs Choose from the following menus P Playback 259 T Setup V 325 Shooting V 268 amp Retouch 2 341 Custom Settings V 278 1 8 My Menu or Recent settings defaults to My Menu 366 Slider shows position in current menu 7 Monitor brightness Clean image sensor Elomi
330. t Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see Custom Setting d3 Max continuous release M 293 For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst see page 436 m 105 p 106 Self Timer Mode The self timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits T Mount the camera ona tripod Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable level surface 2 Select self timer mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Release mode dial 3 Frame the photograph and focus In single servo autofocus M 91 J N photographs can only be taken if the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter When taking photos without your eye to the viewfind
331. t colors are unaffected by the color of the light source Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources If the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance choose an option from the list below or use preset white balance Option Colortemp Description AUTO Auto White balance is adjusted Normal 3 500 automatically For best results use type Keep warm lighting 8 000K G or D lens If built in or optional flash colors fires results are adjusted appropriately Incandescent 3 000 K Use under incandescent lighting a Fluorescent Use with Sodium vapor lighting found in Sodium vaporlamps 2 700 K sports venues Warmewhite 3 000 K_ e Warm white fluorescent lights fluorescent White fluorescent 3 700 K_ White fluorescent lights Coorwhite 4 200K_ Cool white fluorescent lights fluorescent Par g 5 000K Daylight white fluorescent lights Daylight fluorescent 6 500K Daylight fluorescent lights High temp 7200K High color temperature light sources mercury vapor e g mercury vapor lamps Direct sunlight 5 200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight 4 Flash 5 400 K_ Use with built in or optional flash units Cloudy 6 000 K_ Use in daylight under overcast skies G Shade 8 000 K Usein daylight with subjects in the shade 145 146 Option Color temp Description 2 500 Choos
332. t is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off HE Clean Now 1 Place the camera base down Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera is placed base down as shown at right 2 Select Clean image sensor in the setup menu Press MENU to display the menus Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup menu and press gt MENU button l 6 i ea 7 SETUP MENU ic Format memory card 7 Monitor brightness Lock mirror up for cleaning Image Dust Off ref photo HDMI Flicker reduction Time zone and date Clean image sensor 3 Select Clean now Highlight Clean now and press The camera will check the image sensor and then begin cleaning This process takes about ten seconds during this time bu 54 is displayed in the control panel and other operations can not be performed Do not remove or disconnect the power source until cleaning is complete and tu 5 4 is no longer displayed Clean now Clean at startup shutdown button 0K Ost HE Clean at Startup Shutdown Choose from the following options Opti
333. t time bracketing is activated White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF RAW Selecting NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display A 149 No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis In self timer mode the number of copies specified in the white balance program will be created each time the shutter is released regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots V 291 If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded ADL Bracketing The camera varies Active D Lighting over a series of exposures For more information on Active D Lighting see page 174 1 Select ADL bracketing Auto bracketing set Choose ADL bracketing for Custom ea Es AEA fash O Setting e5 Auto bracketing set E Flash only WB WB bracketing E ADL bracketing 0K A 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel Number of shots BKT button Main command Control panel dial ADL b
334. tamp PictBridge Time zone 106 201 Toning Set Picture Control 166 168 Transfer PHOtOGrFaPNS seescsseeceeeeees 243 Tripod Two button reset Type D lens Type G lens U 86 243 248 1 243 248 Vibration reduction mode switch 24 VICWHINGEN cccsssessssseesssseessseecsese 8 35 424 Viewfinder eyepiece 36 106 203 Viewfinder FOCUS 35 388 Viewing photographs on TV 256 ViewNxX 2 85 239 274 331 334 Vignette control 275 Virtual horizon 54 66 313 337 Vivid Set Picture Control s s s 163 w Warm filter we 137 145 WB bracketing Auto bracketing set 137 307 White balance White balance bracketing Wide area AF Wireless Wireless network Wireless transmitter 000 Nikon No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION CE NIKON CORPORATION Printed in Thailand 2011 Nikon Corporation 6MB12211 02
335. te given on page 104 Use for Continuous 5 rie i moving subjects Lower built in flash 1 182 continuous high speed A ane release is not available while flash is raised As for single frame except that noise is reduced by disabling beeps and minimizing sound produced when a mirror drops back into place Beep does not sound when Quiet camera focuses regardless of setting selected for Custom butter Setting d1 Beep M 292 and mirror does not drop back into place until shutter release button is returned to release a halfway position after shooting allowing you to delay noise made by mirror Mirror is quieter than in single frame mode Use self timer for self portraits or to reduce blurring caused Self timer by camera shake 1 106 g 104 Mode Description Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto Mur or close up photography or in other situations in which the Mirrorup slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs 2 108 Power Source and Frame Rate The maximum frame advance rate varies with the power source used The figures below are the average maximum frame rates available with continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster settings other than Custom Setting d2 at default values and memory remaining in the memory buffer Power source Maximum frame rate Battery EN EL15 5 fps EH
336. teccssececssecesnseeesssecessueecsenseesees 394 Clean NOW w ceessscssseccsssecsssseccesseeccsnseessnsesesnseessasececsseesenueessaeees 394 Clean at Startup Shutdown ee cssseessccssssecseessseesseesssees 396 Manual Cleaning siiissiascsseccteriacsiesscacesaiictaatanraeccanntttanpeancccatanteny 397 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions 401 DSF AUIS sipresse as 405 EXPOSUFE PROGKAIN castscesscssccssessssessecsssesesoizetacetesecosgensstasgssdetaesdessteosedie 411 Troubleshooting Error MCSSAGES ssisssscisesstecenssusesssssusecessatsesdessassensusndecbessusosbecsosscossetbsdsoed Specifications sesecsssecsssecsssscsseccsusccsscecssecessccessccssseccsscesssccssceesueeesasees Approved Memory Cards Memory Card Capacity Battery Lite isssizscetssccasasiecsseSeacssacasscensssascosxescbetesssosrasiaatas bausetnaaatstocancted IAA E EE E AE For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol A This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Nikon product BE WARNINGS A Keep the sun out of the frame Keep the sun wel
337. tep value 00 i TTL J 181 185 382 JPEG JPEG basic JPEG compression JPEG fine JPEG normal L 84 84 Landscape Language LCD brightness LCD NUMINATION ee eeeccssecssseeccsseeceeee 296 Lens cap Lens distance information Lens focus ring Lens mount LIVE VIEW ssssssssssssssssssesssssee Live view photography Live view selector Lock mirror up for cleaning Long exposure NR Lossless compressed Type M M Manual focus M medium Magnifying eyepiece Manage Picture Control 169 Manual Exposure mode 122 Manual flash Manual focus Matrix Max continuous release Maximum aperture Maximum sensitivity 297 298 Memory buffer 40 105 Memory Card nsss 29 32 326 434 Memory card Capacity 436 Metering Microphone Miniature effect Minimum aperture Minimum shutter speed Mired Mirror w 108 398 Mirror up w 108 398 Mirror up mode Modeling flash MONICOS esseecseeessees Monitor cover Monitor off delay Monitor pre flash 185 301 Monochrome 347 Monochrome Set Picture Control 163 Mounting index 3 25 Movie live view Movie settingS sssssessssssssoressssssosseesesssssse Movie record button NEF RAW sccsssssssssescssseees NEF RAW bit depth NEF RAW processing
338. tes proceed to step 5 Time lapse photography 3 Choose the interval Press lt or gt to highlight minutes or seconds press A or to change Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed Press gt to continue Time lapse photography Ointerval a omi 7 s 3 i 0 85 42 1 4 select the shooting time Press lt or P to highlight hours or minutes press A or W to change The maximum shooting time is 7 hours and 59 minutes Press to continue Time lapse photography fal Shooting time Time lapse photography 5 start shooting Highlight On and press to return to the shooting menu without starting time lapse photography highlight Off and press button Off 00 02 7 85 42 1 i ia Time lapse photography starts after 3 s The camera takes photographs at the interval selected in Step 3 for the time selected in Step 4 The memory card access lamp lights while each shot is recorded note that because shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary Shooting will not begin if a time lapse movie can not be recorded at current settings for example if the memory card is full the interval or shooting time is zero or the interval is longer than the shooting time When complete
339. th DX format cameras and have a smaller angle of view than lenses for 35mm format cameras If Auto DX crop is off and an option other than DX 24x 16 DX format is selected for Image area when a DX lens is attached the edges of the image may be eclipsed This may not be apparent in the viewfinder but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out The Viewfinder Display The 1 2 x DX format and 5 4 crops are shown below the area outside the crop can be viewed in gray when Off is selected for Custom Setting a5 AF point illumination N 284 1 2x DX format 5 4 See Also See page 67 for information on the crops available in movie live view 81 82 Image area can be set using the Image area option in the shooting menu or by pressing a control and rotating a command dial The Image Area Menu 1 Select Image area in the shooting menu Press MENU to display the menus Highlight Image area in the shooting menu M 268 and press gt MENU button SHOOTING MENU Image area JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting 2 Choose an option Highlight Auto DX crop or Choose image area and press b gt Image area Auto DX crop Choose image area 3 Adjust settings Choose an option and press The select
340. the built in flash in commander mode see Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash M 301 See page 380 for information on using optional flash units Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range The range of the built in flash varies with sensitivity ISO equivalency and aperture Aperture at ISO equivalent of Range 100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 m 1 4 2 2 8 4 5 6 8 11 0 7 8 5 2ft 4in 27ft 11in 2 2 8 4 5 6 8 11 16 0 6 6 0 2ftOin 19ft 8in 2 8 4 5 6 8 11 16 22 0 6 4 2 2ft Oin 13ft Qin 4 5 6 8 11 16 22 32 0 6 3 0 2ft0in 9ft 10in 5 6 8 11 16 22 32 0 6 2 1 2ft0in 6ft11in 8 11 16 22 32 0 6 1 5 2ft0in 4ft11in 11 16 22 32 0 6 1 1 2ftOin 3ft 7in 16 22 32 0 6 0 8 2ftOin 2ft 7in The built in flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft In exposure mode F the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 2 8 3 5 4 5 5 6 7 1 8 If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens 187 188 Flash Compensation Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from 3 EV to 1 EV in increments of 1 3 EV ch
341. the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus If On or On image review excluded is selected the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback and move the menu highlight bar up or down The sub command dial is ph used to display additional photo information in full frame playback playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback Select On image review excluded to prevent the command dials from being used for playback during image review While menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press gt the center of the multi selector or 318 f10 Release Button to Use Dial MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by holding the MODE ut Hid Eid BKT ISO QUAL WB or AF mode button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released this also applies to the Fn and depth of field preview buttons if they have been assigned Active D Lighting using Custom Setting f4 Assign Fn button m 314 or Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button M 315 Setting ends when any of the affected buttons is
342. ths Y Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten battery life Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery performance and the battery may not charge or charge only partially Wait for the battery to cool before charging Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement Purchase a new EN EL15 battery Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL15 battery and keep it fully charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice Note that on cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery ina warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge Used batteries are a valuable resource recycle in accord with local regulations Defaults The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed below For information on two button reset
343. ting menu banks using the Extended menu banks option in the shooting menu M 270 269 HE Restoring Default Settings To restore default settings mm Settings in the selected highlight a bank in the shooting menu bank will be reset to default values Shooting menu bank menu and press 1 ra A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press to restore default settings for the selected bank See page 405 for a list of default settings Extended Menu Banks MENU button gt shooting menu Select On to include exposure mode shutter Extended menu banks speed modes 5 and M only and aperture a modes A and M only in the information On recorded in each of the four shooting menu O oO banks to be recalled whenever the bank is selected Selecting Off restores the values in effect before On was selected T 2 button 270 Storage Folder MENU button gt shooting menu Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored HE Select Folder by Number 1 Choose Select folder by Storage folder fal Select folder by number number Highlight Select folder by eea ono number and press The TOL dialog shown at right will be z gt displayed with the current primary slot M 89 underlined 100 999 Move Set MOK 2 Choose a folder number Press lt or gt to highlight a digit press A or W to change Ifa folder with the selected number alre
344. tion i i Long exposure noise reduction NORNA E Active D Lighting YANOTYPES a HDR exposure differential p HDR smoothing P Pg Vignette control essences EJ Retouch history Image comment EJ Name of photographer sssssssssssss 334 ae EJ Copyright holder 334 NIKON The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photograph as described on page 334 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on Displayed if Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 290 has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method Displayed only if VR lens is attached Displayed in yellow if picture is in non FX format including DX based movie format 67 79 Standard Vivid Portrait and Landscape Picture Controls only Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls Monochrome Picture Controls only EE GPS Data ee i F Latitude ATITUD E longitude i 2 9 43 696 JE Altitude UAE Coordinated Universal Time UTC FH Heading camera name a Image area j 6 7 aw nN oa uw 1 Data for movies are for start of recording Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass 3 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non FX format including DX based movie format 67 79 N 229 230 BE
345. tion display Removing Memory Cards After confirming that the access lamp is off turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover SD memory cards Press the card in to eject it The memory card can then be removed by hand CompactFlash memory cards Press the eject button to partially eject the card The memory card can then be removed by hand Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card 31 Format the Memory Card Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being used or formatted in other devices m Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding M 239 1 Turn the camera on 2 Press the MODE nm and sam buttons Hold the MODE and f a buttons down simultaneously until a blinking F a r format appears in the shutter speed displays in the control panel and viewfinder If two ll memory cards are inserted T the card to be formatted is shown by a flashing icon By a y default the primary card slot Z 89 will be selected you can choose the secondary slot TN ZIN by rotating the main command dial To exit without formatting the memory card w
346. to be used to select the focus point 2 Select the focus point Use the multi selector to select the focus point in the viewfinder while the exposure meters are on The center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked L position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed Auto area AF The focus point for auto area AF is selected automatically manual focus point selection is not available See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated see Custom Setting a5 AF point illumination 284 For information on setting focus point selection to wrap around see Custom Setting a6 Focus point wrap around 284 For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector see Custom Setting a7 Number of focus points A 285 For information on changing the role of the multi selector center button see Custom Setting f2 Multi selector center button N 309 97 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus M 91 you can also focus on another subject at the same distance and then
347. top o 30 right to left and left to right so that E Wrap for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display The focus point display is bounded by the outermost focus Nowrap points so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect 284 a7 Number of Focus Points MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus point selection Option Description AF51 51 points Choose from the 51 focus points shown at right n 900 9 9 9o00 90009000000 oo0000000000 0000000000 a S9eanesee AF11 11 points Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right Use for quick focus point selection 285 286 a8 Built in AF assist Illuminator Wen button Custom Settings menu Choose whether the built in AF assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor Option Description The AF assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor viewfinder photography only AF assist illumination is only available when both of the following conditions are met On 1 AF S is selected for autofocus mode 91 2 Auto area AF is chosen for AF area mode M 93 or an option other than auto
348. trol mode for the built in flash is shown in the information display SRB 0A GA OM BT a A S Manual and Repeating Flash icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected The SB 400 When an optional SB 400 flash unit is attached Optional flash and turned on Custom Setting e3 changes to Optional flash allowing the flash control mode Ea i M Manual for the SB 400 to be selected from TTL and Manual Repeating flash and Commander mode options are not available Times The options available for Repeating Flash gt Times are determined by flash output Output Options available for Times Output Options available for Times 1 4 2 1 32 2 10 15 1 8 2 5 1 64 2 10 15 20 25 1 16 2 10 1 128 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 BE Commander Mode Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional flash units in up to two groups A and B using advanced wireless lighting M 382 Selecting this option displays the menu Flash entri for builtin flash shown at right Press or gt to highlight the following options A or W to change Builtin flash Commander mode Mode Comp Group A Group B Channel Option Description aa Choose a flash mode for the built in flash commander flash TIL i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV
349. tton A photograph will be displayed in the monitor The memory card containing the picture currently displayed is shown by an icon gt button 2 View additional pictures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or P To view additional information on the current photograph press A and W M 222 1 12 NIKON D800 bd Mee P 1 125 F5 6 E100 85mm MEAT 0 sRGB ESD E 100ND800 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 10 01 2012 10 06 22 97360x4912 To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu A 265 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting See Also See page 221 for information on choosing a memory card slot 43 Deleting Unwanted Photographs Unwanted photographs can be deleted by pressing the button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted 1 Display the photograph Display the photograph you wish to delete as described in Viewing Photographs on the previous page The location of the current image is shown by an icon at the bottom left corner of the display 2 Delete the photograph Press the 1 m button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press the t sm E 1001 button again to delete the sor image and return to ii button playback To e
350. tween 1 and 9 3 Enter the focal length and Non CPU lens data aperture Done Lens number Highlight Focal length mm 7 Foal len tnm or Maximum aperture and press lt or P to edit the highlighted item Focal length can be selected from values between 6 and 4 000 mm maximum aperture from values between f 1 2 and f 22 213 214 4 Select Done Non CPU lens data Highlight Done and press The specified focal length and aperture will be stored under the chosen lens number button Focal length mm Maximum aperture To recall lens data when using a non CPU lens 1 Assign non CPU lens number selection to a camera control Select Choose non CPU lens number as the button command dials option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu M 314 Non CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f4 Assign Fn button M 311 the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button 315 or the t AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button 2 315 Use the selected control to choose a lens number Press the selected button and rotate the main or sub command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel Focal Maximum length aperture Main command dial Lens number Using a GPS Unit A GPS unit can be connected to the ten pin remote terminal al
351. umber of exposures remaining If Show ISO Easy ISO is selected ISO sensitivity can be set in exposure modes F and by rotating the sub command dial or in mode A by rotating the main command dial Select Show frame count to display the number of exposures remaining in the viewfinder and control panel d8 Screen Tips MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose On to display tool tips for items 48 Screen tips selected in the information display 2 13 295 d9 Information Display MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Auto AUTO is selected the color of the lettering in the information display A 10 will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose Dark on light B black lettering or Light on dark W white lettering Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color P_82 58 66 ON FX ENNA SON mF sRGB 0A GMA Om BKT S amp S Dark on light d10 LCD Illumination MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Off is selected the control panel backlight ON LCD illuminator will only light while the power switch is rotated toward 8 If On is selected the control panel will be illuminated whenever the exposure meters are active CO 42 Select Off for increased battery life Light on dark 296 d11 MB D12 B
352. unction Image quality EZ image size o Using Two Memory Cards When two memory cards are inserted in the camera you can choose one as the primary card using the Primary slot selection item in the shooting menu Select SD card slot to designate the card in the SD card slot as the primary card CF card slot to choose the CompactFlash card The roles played by the primary and secondary cards can be chosen using the Secondary slot function option in the shooting menu Choose from Overflow the secondary card is used only when the primary card is full Backup each picture is recorded to both the primary and secondary card and RAW primary JPEG secondary as for Backup except that the NEF RAW copies of photos recorded at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are recorded only to the primary card and the JPEG copies only to the secondary card vV Backup and RAW Primary JPEG Secondary The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of memory Shutter release will be disabled when either card is full Recording Movies When two memory cards are inserted in the camera the slot used to record movies can be selected using the Movie settings gt Destination option in the shooting menu 70 89 90 E e e Focus This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses when photographs are framed in the viewfinder Focus can be adjusted automatically see below
353. wer switch is rotated toward 8 again 1 Viewfinder s ssssssssssssrosresrrssronreeene 35 2 Viewfinder eyepiece 36 106 E Diopter adjustment control 35 By Metering selector a ereceeens 116 Art button D AE AF lock 98 128 315 323 AF ON button 4 AF ON ossssssssssssesereerseereesss 46 60 92 Main command dial 0 0008 317 8 Multi selector ssse 16 42 221 9 Memory card slot cover 29 31 g Focus selector l0Ck eseeeessssssesesseeee 96 MEESE 73 button Live VIEW s ssssssseosssssessrssssssese 45 59 13 Live view selector uve 45 59 14 Memory card access lamp 30 31 15 info DUTLON Lv esses 10 13 Ambient brightness sensor for automatic monitor brightness 0 011 0 oe 53 326 OK UttON ccatarceenssttcastens 18 QE button Thumbnail eesseesseessseesseesees 219 Playback zoom out e 231 Q button Playback ZOOM in ssesssssesees 231 O n E2 button PROTEGE sssscasissccosesssscssivassiqessaveniess 233 Picture CONtIOL ccssseesseeesees 163 MOM a A E T 18 MENU button a MOI dcssicssststicieseacaeeosicesciesee 15 259 A Monitor 43 45 53 219 326 E button Playback ecsssssscssssseseeeseees 43 219 29 1 5 button De Cte sik sssscsosssiacencasistucnacoscods 44 234 Formatting memory card 32 25 Eyepiece shutter lever 36 106 The Control Panel B eabsnishitish
354. while the 1 2x 30x20 angle of view is about 1 2 times smaller and the 5 4 30x24 angle of view is about 1 1 times smaller To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm format when DX 24x 16 is selected multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1 5 by about 1 2 when is 1 2x 30x20 selected or by about 1 1 when 5 4 30x24 is selected for example the effective focal length of a 50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX 24x 16 is selected 60 mm when 1 2x 30x 20 is selected or 55 mm when 5 4 30x24 is selected Optional Flash Units Speedlights The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS and can be used with CLS compatible flash units Optional flash units can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described below The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash units with a locking pin 1 Remove the accessory shoe cover 2 Mount the flash unit on the accessory shoe See the manual provided with the flash unit for details The built in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached The Sync Terminal A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal as required Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advan
355. with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside Camera wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled body water and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and Lens lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can mirror and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove viewfinder fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this could result in damage or malfunction Monitor Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture elemen
356. wn together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panel turns off briefly while settings are reset button lt a QUAL button BE Settings Accessible from the Shooting Menu Option Default Option Default Image quality JPEG normal HDR high dynamic oft Image size Large range White baldnce Auto gt ISO sensitivity 100 Normal Auto ISO sensitivity off Fine tuning A B 0 G M 0 control Picture Control za Multiple exposure off4 settings Unmodined Interval timer shooting off 1 With the exception of multiple exposure and interval timer settings only settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset CQ 269 Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected 2 Current Picture Control only 3 Exposure differential and smoothing are not reset 4 If multiple exposure is currently in progress shooting will end and multiple exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point Gain and number of shots are not reset 5 If interval timer shooting is currently in progress shooting will end Starting time shooting interval and number of intervals and shots are not reset 193 Other Settings Option Default Option Default Focus point Center AF area mode Exposure mode Programmeg Viewfinder Single point auto AF Flexible program off Suy
357. xit without deleting the picture press PJ Delete To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which images will be deleted use the Delete option in the playback menu 236 Live View Photography Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view 1 Rotate the live view selector to D live view photography 2 Press the O button The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder button 3 Position the focus point Position the focus point over your subject as described on page 48 45 46 4 Focus AF ON Press the shutter release button halfway or press the AF ON button to focus pea JH The focus point will blink green while the AE L AF L button camera focuses If the camera is able to focus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will blink red note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point blinks red check focus in the monitor before shooting Exposure can be locked by pressing the t AE L AF L button M 128 focus locks while the shutter release button is pressed halfway Exposure Preview During live view photography you can press to preview the effects of shutter speed aperture and ISO sensitivity on e
358. xposure Exposure can be adjusted by 5 EV 130 although only values between 3 and 3 EV are reflected in the preview display Note that the preview may not accurately reflect the final results when flash lighting is used Active D Lighting 2 174 High Dynamic Range HDR M 176 or bracketing is in effect A auto is selected for the Picture Control Contrast parameter Q 166 or x 25 ais selected for shutter speed If the subject is very bright or very dark the exposure indicators will flash to warn that the preview may not accurately reflect exposure Exposure preview is not available when tu amp is selected for shutter speed 5 Take the picture 9 Press the shutter release button the rest gN of the way down to shoot The monitor will turn off Exit live view mode Press the button to exit live view mode m Using Autofocus in Live View Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters Note that in live view autofocus is slower and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame e The subject lacks contrast The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or
359. xposure compensation M 130 is preferred in most situations 290 c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L menu button gt Custom Settings menu If On is selected exposure will lock when the c1 Shutterrelease button AEL shutter release button is pressed halfway c2 Auto Meter off Delay MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how long the camera continues to cZ Auto meter off delay meter exposure when no operations are performed The shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off automatically when the exposure meters turn off Choose a shorter meter off delay for longer battery life c3 Self Timer MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the length of the shutter release 3 Self timer delay the number of shots taken and the pa interval between shots in self timer mode Number of shots 1 m 106 Interval between shots 05s Self timer delay Choose the length of the ER Self timer del shutter release delay ner ee 17 Ors 2s O5s 5s Oss a O Os 20 s Number of shots Press A and W to choose the c3 Selftimer i Number of shot number of shots taken each time the WAANS 7 shutter release button is pressed Interval between shots Choose the interval c3 Selftimer Interval bet hot between shots when the Number of shots Dg is more than 1 5s 05 5 291 292 c4 Monitor off Delay MENU button gt Custom S
360. y The camera clock is powered by an independent rechargeable power source which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5b AC adapter M 387 Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months If the icon flashes in the control panel the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset Set the clock to the correct time and date The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary GPS Units 215 If a GPS unit is connected the camera clock will be set to the time and date provided by the GPS unit 218 Insert a Memory Card Pictures are stored on memory cards available separately Q 434 The camera is equipped with two card slots one for SD and the other for Type CompactFlash cards Type Il cards and microdrives can not be used 1 Turn the camera off Power switch oN RRA m Inserting and Removing Memory Cards Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards 2 Open the card slot cover Slide the card slot cover out D and open the card slot 29 30 3 Insert the memory card SD memory cards Holding the card as shown slide it into the SD card slot until it clicks into place The green a
361. zero GF and is no longer displayed The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset M 193 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated ADL Bracketing In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed In self timer mode the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 141 each time the shutter release button is pressed regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots N 291 the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Interval between shots In other modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on ESE White Balance White Balance Options White balance ensures tha

Nikon D800 E User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents